Acts 7:42 — Word Study
N1904ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
BSATurned awaystrephō▸ [rejected, abandoned] howeverde <the>ho Godtheos [the supreme Creator, Elohim] andkai deliveredparadidōmi▸ [handed them over, surrendered] themautos to worshiplatreuō▸ [service, ministry] theho hoststratia [army, multitude] <the>ho of heaven,ouranos [the sky, the celestial realm] even askathōs it has been writtengraphō■✻ [recorded, inscribed] in [the]en bookbiblos [scroll, scripture] of theho prophets:prophētēs [messengers, spokesmen] Notmē slain beastssphagion△ [slain beasts, offerings] andkai sacrificesthusia [gifts, oblations] did you offerprospherō▸ [offer, present] to Meegō yearsetos fortytessarakonta [a period of testing, 40 years] inen theho wilderness,erēmos [desert, uninhabited land] O houseoikos [family, nation] of Israel?Israēl [God's chosen people]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| ἔστρεψεν | Turned away | Verb, aorist, active |
| δὲ | however | Conjunction |
| ὁ | <the> | Article, nominative, singular |
| θεὸς | God | Noun, nominative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| παρέδωκεν | delivered | Verb, aorist, active |
| αὐτοὺς | them | Personal pronoun, accusative, plural |
| λατρεύειν | to worship | Verb, present, active |
| τῇ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| στρατιᾷ | host | Noun, dative, singular |
| τοῦ | <the> | Article, genitive, singular |
| οὐρανοῦ, | of heaven, | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καθὼς | even as | Adverb |
| γέγραπται | it has been written | Verb, perfect, passive |
| ἐν | in [the] | Preposition |
| βίβλῳ | book | Noun, dative, singular |
| τῶν | of the | Article, genitive, plural |
| προφητῶν· | prophets: | Noun, genitive, plural |
| μὴ | Not | Particle, negative |
| σφάγια | slain beasts | Noun, accusative, plural |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| θυσίας | sacrifices | Noun, accusative, plural |
| προσηνέγκατέ | did you offer | Verb, aorist, active |
| μοι | to Me | Personal pronoun, first person, dative |
| ἔτη | years | Noun, accusative, plural |
| τεσσεράκοντα | forty | Adjective, nominative |
| ἐν | in | Preposition |
| τῇ | the | Article, dative, singular |
| ἐρήμῳ, | wilderness, | Adjective, dative, singular |
| οἶκος | O house | Noun, nominative, singular |
| Ἰσραήλ; | of Israel? | Noun, proper name, indeclinable |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | But God turned away from them and gave them over to the worship of the host of heaven, as it is written in the book of the prophets: ‘Did you bring Me sacrifices and offerings forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel? |
| KJV | Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices by the space of forty years in the wilderness? |
| ASV | But God turned, and gave them up to serve the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, Did ye offer unto me slain beasts and sacrifices Forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel? |
| YLT | and God did turn, and did give them up to do service to the host of the heaven, according as it hath been written in the scroll of the prophets: Slain beasts and sacrifices did ye offer to Me forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel? |
| WEB | But God turned away and gave them up to serve the army of the sky, as it is written in the book of the prophets, ‘Did you offer to me slain animals and sacrifices forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel? |
| BBE | But God was turned from them and let them give worship to the stars of heaven, as it says in the book of the prophets, Did you make offerings to me of sheep and oxen for forty years in the waste land, O house of Israel? |
Where they part company is στρέφω — see How Translations Differ.
The verse consists of a main clause followed by a subordinate clause and a direct quotation, illustrating a clear sequence of thought.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbστρέφω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
1 of 31 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Acts 7:42
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — Stephen's Speech Before the Sanhedringenerated
Acts 7:42 recounts how God turned away from the Israelites due to their persistent idolatry, specifically their worship of the heavenly host. This moment in Stephen's speech serves as a reminder of Israel's history of turning away from God, as he cites the prophets to emphasize the consequences of their actions. The reference to the forty years in the wilderness highlights a significant period of testing and disobedience for the Israelites, connecting their past failures to their present rejection of God's message.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Psalm 81:11–12 | But My people would not listen to Me, and Israel would not obey Me. |
| 2 | Isaiah 66:4 | So I will choose their punishment and I will bring terror upon them, because I called and no one answered, I spoke and no one listened. But they did evil in My sight and chose that in which I did not delight.” |
| 3 | Ezekiel 14:7–10 | For when any Israelite or any foreigner dwelling in Israel separates himself from Me, sets up idols in his heart, and puts a wicked stumbling block before his face, and then comes to the prophet to inquire of Me, I the LORD will answer him Myself. |
| 4 | Ezekiel 20:25–39 | I also gave them over to statutes that were not good and ordinances by which they could not live. |
| 5 | Hosea 4:17 | Ephraim is joined to idols; leave him alone! |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 18 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — στρέφω, strephōgenerated
The verb στρέφω (strephō) means to turn or twist, indicating a complete change of direction. In this context, it signifies God's rejection of Israel's worship practices, turning away from them due to their idolatry.
This aorist active indicative form shows that this action is definitive and completed in the past — God decisively turned away from them.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
In the Berean Standard Bible, the verse uses the phrase turned away, which is echoed in the KJV and ASV. All three translations maintain the sense of God's rejection.
Variations arise in the rendering of λατρεύειν, with serve (ASV, WEB) contrasting with worship (KJV, BSB). This highlights different nuances in the act of worship.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb is ἔστρεψεν, He turned, governing the entire clause. It is followed by a second verb παρέδωκεν, He gave, indicating a sequence of actions taken by God.
The structure includes a noun phrase for the subject (God) and a series of prepositional phrases that elaborate on the worship of the heavenly host, culminating in a quotation from the prophets.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
στρατιᾷ is used in the Septuagint to translate Hebrew terms related to armies or celestial beings, linking this verse to the broader theme of divine judgment and idolatry found in the Old Testament.
The phrase γέγραπται connects to numerous prophetic texts, emphasizing the continuity between the Old Testament prophecies and the events of Israel's history.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Acts 7:42 shows that God turned away from the Israelites because of their worship of false gods, as foretold by the prophets. This rejection serves as a warning about the consequences of turning away from God.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
This indicates that God rejected the Israelites due to their persistent idolatry and disobedience, allowing them to follow their own desires.
Worshiping the host of heaven refers to the Israelites' idolatry, turning away from the true God to worship created things, which is a recurring theme in the Old Testament.
This period symbolizes a time of testing and disobedience for the Israelites, illustrating their failure to trust and follow God despite His guidance.
The reference to the prophets underscores that God's rejection of Israel was foretold, highlighting the continuity of God's message through His messengers.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what ways do I see parallels between Israel's idolatry and modern-day distractions from God?
- How can I ensure that my worship is directed towards God and not towards other 'hosts' in my life?
- What lessons can I learn from Israel's forty years in the wilderness about trust and obedience?
- How can I better understand and apply the teachings of the prophets in my own life?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
The early church Fathers reference this verse to illustrate God's rejection of idolatry and the importance of true worship. Their comments provide insight into the historical and theological implications of Stephen's speech.
"Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the Prophets, O ye house of Israel,Early Church Fathers on Acts 7 →
"As it is written in the Book of the Prophets"-and observe, he does not cite the text without a purpose, but shows by it that there is no need of sacrifices;Early Church Fathers on Acts 7 →
Did you offer to me victims and sacrifices for forty years in the desert? Although they offered libations to the Lord out of necessity, they are said to have truly served idols with their hearts turned away,Early Church Fathers on Acts 7 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Acts 7:42 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleThen God turned,.... Away from them, withdrew his presence, and his favours from them: and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; not angels, but the sun, moon, and stars; for since they liked
Read John Gill on Acts 7 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryThen God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices by the space of forty years in the wilderness?
Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 7 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleThen God turned, from being as a Father to them, to be a Judge over them, to punish them; whereas formerly he had blessed them. And gave them up; this was indeed to deliver them to Satan; God withholding his grace which they had abused, ,25, and giving them up, (to fall from one sin unto another), though not positively, yet permissively. The host of heaven; the angels are so called, ; but it is rather here to be understood of the sun, moon, and stars, which are called so, . In the book of the prophets: the words here referred to are in . It is said to be in the book, in the singular number, because the twelve small prophets are by the Jews mentioned but as one book. Have ye offered to me…
Read Matthew Poole on Acts 7 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments42 Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices by the space of forty years in the wilderness? Ver. 42. Of the prophets] The twelve small prophets were in one volume.
Read John Trapp on Acts 7 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(42) The host of heaven.—The word includes the host or army of the firmament, sun, moon, and stars, as in 2 Chronicles 33:3; 2 Chronicles 33:5; Jeremiah 8:2. The sin of Israel was that it worshipped the created host, instead of Jehovah Sabaoth, the “Lord of hosts.” In the book of the prophets.—The term is used in conformity with the Rabbinic usage which treated the Twelve Minor Prophets as making up a single book. Have ye offered to me . . .?—Better, did ye offer . . . ? The words are, with one exception, from the LXX. of Amos 5:25-26. The narrative of the Pentateuch is inconsistent with the statement that no sacrifices were offered to Jehovah during the forty years’ wandering; but the…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 7 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 42. Then God turned, and gave them up, c.] He left them to themselves, and then they deified and worshipped the sun, moon, planets, and principal stars. In the book of the prophets] As this quotation is found in Amos, Amos 5:25, by the book of the prophets is meant the twelve minor prophets, which, in the ancient Jewish division of the sacred writings, formed only one book. Have ye offered to me slain beasts] It is certain that the Israelites did offer various sacrifices to God, while in the wilderness and it is as certain that they scarcely ever did it with an upright heart. They were idolatrous, either in heart or act, in almost all their religious services; these were therefore so…
Read AdamClarke on Acts 7 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges42. Then God turned] Read, But. Cp. Joshua 24:20, “If ye forsake the Lord and serve strange gods, then he will turn and do you hurt.”and gave them up to worship [serve] the host of heaven] God had previously warned them against this kind of idolatry (Deuteronomy 4:19), but we learn from the records of their historians (2 Kings 17:16) and their prophets (Jeremiah 19:13; Zephaniah 1:5) that the warning was given in vain.as it is written in the book of the prophets] The Hebrews divided their Scriptures into three sections, the Law, the Prophets, and the Hagiographa (called the Psalms, Luke 24:44), and each of these parts is looked upon as a special and separate book. The Law comprised the five…
Read Cambridge on Acts 7 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleThen God turned - That is, turned away from them; abandoned them to their own desires. The host of heaven - The stars, or heavenly bodies.
Read Albert Barnes on Acts 7 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
But God turned away from them and gave them over to the worship of the host of heaven, as it is written in the book of the prophets: ‘Did you bring Me sacrifices and offerings forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
But God turned away and gave them up to serve the army of the sky, as it is written in the book of the prophets, ‘Did you offer to me slain animals and sacrifices forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
But God turned away from them and gave them over to the worship of the host of heaven, as it is written in the book of the prophets: ‘Did you bring Me sacrifices and offerings forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
But God turned away from them and gave them over to worship the host of heaven, as it is written in the book of the prophets: ‘It was not to me that you offered slain animals and sacrifices forty years in the wilderness, was it, house of Israel?
Tyndale line
Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices by the space of forty years in the wilderness?
But God turned, and gave them up to serve the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, Did ye offer unto me slain beasts and sacrifices Forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
But God turned, and gave them up to serve the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, Did ye offer unto me slain beasts and sacrifices Forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices during forty years in the wilderness?
Then God turned himselfe away, and gaue them vp to serue the host of heauen, as it is written in the booke of the Prophets, O house of Israel, haue ye offred to me slaine beasts and sacrifices by the space of fourtie yeres in the wildernes?
Strictly literal
But God turned and delivered them up to serve the host of heaven; as it is written in [the] book of the prophets, Have ye offered me victims and sacrifices forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
and God did turn, and did give them up to do service to the host of the heaven, according as it hath been written in the scroll of the prophets: Slain beasts and sacrifices did ye offer to Me forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
and God turned, and gave them up to do service to the host of Heaven, according as it has been written in the scroll of the Prophets: Did you offer slain beasts and sacrifices to Me forty years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?
But God turned and gave them up to worship the stars in the sky, as it is written in the book of the prophets, 'Did you offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for forty years in the wilderness, house of Israel?
From the Latin
And God turned, and gave them up to serve the host of heaven, as it is written in the books of the prophets: Did you offer victims and sacrifices to me for forty years, in the desert, O house of Israel?
Simplified
So God gave up on them. He left them to their worship of the stars in the sky. This is what the prophets wrote, ‘Were you giving offerings or making sacrifices to me during the forty years in the desert, you Israelites?
But God was turned from them and let them give worship to the stars of heaven, as it says in the book of the prophets, Did you make offerings to me of sheep and oxen for forty years in the waste land, O house of Israel?
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Convertit autem Deus, et tradidit eos servire militiæ cæli, sicut scriptum est in libro prophetarum : [Numquid victimas et hostias obtulistis mihi/ annis quadraginta in deserto, domus Israël ?/
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܘܗܦܟ ܐܠܗܐ ܘܐܫܠܡ ܐܢܘܢ ܕܢܗܘܘܢ ܦܠܚܝܢ ܠܚܝܠܘܬܐ ܕܫܡܝܐ ܐܝܟ ܕܟܬܝܒ ܒܟܬܒܐ ܕܢܒܝܐ ܠܡܐ ܐܪܒܥܝܢ ܫܢܝܢ ܒܡܕܒܪܐ ܢܟܣܬܐ ܐܘ ܕܒܚܬܐ ܩܪܒܬܘܢ ܠܝ ܒܢܝ ܐܝܣܪܝܠ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The previous edition, still widely cited.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
ἔστρεψεν δὲ ὁ θεὸς καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς λατρεύειν τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν· μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ;
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
Every edition agrees. All 8 printed editions — Nestle-Aland 28, Nestle-Aland 27, SBLGNT, Westcott-Hort, Tregelles, Tyndale House 2017, Textus Receptus (KJV), Byzantine majority — carry every word of this verse, in the same order, with no difference that any translator would render differently.
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Acts 7:42
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
στρέφω (strephō) means to turn or twist, often used in both literal and metaphorical contexts. It can refer to physically turning objects, like horses or shields, as well as changing one's course or mindset, such as in repentance or conversion. The New Testament employs it in various ways, including to indicate a change of heart (e.g., Mt 18:3) or direction (e.g., Ac 7:42).
στρέφω
[in LXX chiefly for הפך, also for סבב, etc. ;]
to turn: c. acc. rei dat. pers., Mt 5:39; = ἀποσ-, to bring back, Mt 27:3 (cf. Is 38:8); reflexively (WM, § 38, 1), to turn oneself, Ac 7:42; c. acc. seq. εἰς, = μετασ-, to change, Re 11:6. Pass., reflexive, to turn oneself: seq. εἰς, Jo 20:14, Ac 7:39 13:46; ptcp., στραφείς, c. indic., Mt 7:6 9:22 16:23, Lk 7:9 9:55 14:25 22:61, Jo 1:38 20:16; id. seq. πρός, Read the full entry →
στρέφω: 1 aor. ἔστρεψα; Pass., pres. στρέφομαι 2 aor. ἐστράφην; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 337, also for 31D, ete. ; to turn, turn round : τί τινι, to turn a thing to one, Mt. v. 39,and T Tr WH in xxvii. 3 [for ἀποστρέφω, to bring back ; see ἀποστρέφω, 2]; reflexively (W. § 38, 1; Β. § 130, 4), to turn one’s self (i.e. to turn the back to one: used of one who no longer cares for another), Acts vii. 42 [cf. W. 469 (437)]; τὲ εἴς τι; iq. μεταστρέφω, to turn one thing into another, Rev. xi. 6. ively, to turn one’s self: στραφείς foll. by a finite verb, having turned etc., Mt. vii.6; [ix. 221, TTrWH]; xvi. 23> Lk. vil. 5; ix. 55; xiv. 25; xxii. 61; Jn. 1.383 xx. 16 ; στραφεὶς πρός twa, foll. by a fin. verb, [turning unto etc., or urned unto and ete. ], Lk. vii. 44; x. 21 (22) [R
στρέφω (strephō) — to turn.
στρέφω,
[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect στράφω [ᾰ] [Refs]; Aeolic dialect στροφῶ (to be read στρόφω) [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect
__A στρέψασκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future στρέψω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἔστρεψα [Refs], Epic dialect στρέψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἔστροφα (ἀν-) [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; also ἔστρᾰφα (κατ-) [Refs 2nd c.BC+] codices:—middle, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future στρέψομαι [Refs]: aorist ἐστρεψάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect passive (in middle sense) ἔστραμμαι (κατ-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future στρᾰφήσομαι [LXX+5th c.BC+]; future middle (in passive sense) στρέψομαι (ἀπο-) [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 1 ἐστρέφθην frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+], rare in Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐστράφθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἐστράφην [ᾰ] [Refs 6th c.BC+], frequently in Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]…
στρέφω
strepho
strengthened from the base of 5157; to twist, i.e. turn quite around
or reverse (literally or figuratively):--convert, turn (again, back
again, self, self about).
see GREEK for 5157
στρέφω
v.
I turn, am converted, change
στρέφω strephō 21x
to twist; to turn, Mt. 5:39; to make a change of substance, to change, Rev. 11:6; absol. to change or turn one’s course of dealing, Acts 7:42; mid. to turn one’s self about, Mt. 16:23; Lk. 7:9; to turn back, Acts 7:39; to change one’s direction, to turn elsewhere, Acts 13:46; to change one’s course of principle and conduct, to be converted, Mt. 18:3
στρέφω to turn about or aside, turn, Hom., etc.; στρ. ἵππους to turn or guide horses, Il.; στρ. σάκος to sway the shield, Soph.
ἄνω καὶ κάτω στρ. to turn upside down, Aesch., Plat.; so, κάτω στρ. Soph.; so, στρέφειν alone, to overturn, upset, Eur.
to twist a rope, Xen.
metaph. of pain, to twist, torture, Ar., Plat.
to twist, plait, ἐστραμμένα Xen.: to spin, Luc.
metaph. to turn a thing over in one's mind, τί στρέφω τάδε; Eur., Dem.
to turn from the right course, divert, embezzle, Lys.
Pass. and Mid. to turn oneself, to turn round or about, turn to and fro, Il.; ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα στρέφεσθαι, of one tossing in bed, id. Il.
to turn to or from an object, to turn back, return, id. Il., Soph.; στραφέντες ἔφευγον Xen.
of the heavenly bodies, to revolve, Od.; of the distaff, Plat.
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
εἰ γὰρ τῇ μαρτυρίᾳ χαίρεις ὧν ἂν τύχῃ, στρέφειν καὶ ἀνακυκλεῖν ἕκαστα βουλήσῃ, τοὺς παγέντας ὑπὸ τῆς φύσεως τοῖς πράγμασιν ὅρους μετατιθείς.
τοῦ δὲ προφήτου τὴν βασιλείαν οὕτως αὐτοῦ διασχισθῆναι φήσαντος καὶ λήψεσθαι ταύτην ἀγαθὸν καὶ δίκαιον, ἐμμένειν γὰρ τὸν θεὸν τοῖς περὶ αὐτοῦ κεκριμένοις ὡς τοῦ μεταβάλλεσθαι καὶ στρέφειν τὴν γνώμην ἀνθρωπίνου πάθους ὄντος οὐχὶ θείας ἰσχύος,
ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν: ἐάν τίς σοι δῷ ῥάπισμα εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν σιαγόνα, στρέψον αὐτῷ καὶ τὴν ἄλλην, καὶ ἔσῃ τέλειος: ἐὰν ἀγγαρεύσῃ σέ τις μίλιον ἕν, ὕπαγε μετ̓ αὐτοῦ δύο: ἐὰν ἄρῃ τις τὸ ἱμάτιόν σου, δὸς αὐτῷ καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα: ἐὰν…
σὺ πρόβαλε. σὺ … … … άμενος κόψον σὺ ἀπόφερε χεῖρα … … χερὸς στρέψον καὶ μεταβαλοῦ. σὺ ὕπτιον βάλε … αφ … … … … νοιξ … ναγκ
καὶ ἐλαῖαι τεσσεράκοντα καὶ κρομμύδια. ἴσθι δὲ τὸν κῆπον τετραυματισμένον ἅλι. οὐδέπω ὁ λίθος ἐστράφη. οὔπω οὐδὲν καινότερον. ἐρρῶσθαί σε εὔχομαι εὐτυχῶς. ἀσπάζου τὸν κουράτορα καὶ Σαραπιόδωρον ἐὰν δὲ
φέρειν καὶ εἴσπραξιν τῷ δημοσίῳ λόγῳ, καὶ πολλάκις τοῦτο ἐβουλήθημεν τῷ ἀπόρῳ παραχωρῆσαι, στρέφειν τε οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ καὶ τὴν ὑπόλοιπον κτῆσιν προφάσει τοῦ αὐτοῦ κτήματος, ἕως ὅτε
δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.
δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),
post-positive conjunctive particle;
copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →
δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…
Read the full entry →δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…
Read the full entry →δέ (de) — then.
δέ,
but: adversative and copulative Particle,
I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. without preceding μέν,
II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. copulative,
II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…
δέ
de
a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,
etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).
δέ
Cj.
but, on the other hand, and
δέ de 2x
a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6
δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.
δέ is often redundant,
to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.
to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.
POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.
θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),
[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]
a god or deity, God.
In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.
Of the one true God;
θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…
Read the full entry →θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…
Read the full entry →θεός (theos) — God.
θεός, ὁ,
Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…
Read the full entry →θεός
theos
of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme
Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,
God, god(-ly, -ward).
see GREEK for 3588
θεός, οῦ, ὁ
n.f. & n.m.
God, a god
θεός theos 1x
a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4
θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.
θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…
Read the full entry →Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):
I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA
1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought
2. Definition of the Idea
3. The Knowledge of God
4. Ethnic Ideas of God
(1) Animism
(2) Fetishism
(3) Idolatry
(4) Polytheism
(5) Henotheism
(6) Pantheism
(7) Deism
(8) Semitic Monolatry
(9) Monotheism
II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT
1. The Course of Its Development
2. Forms of Its Manifestation
(1) The Face or Countenance of God
(2) The Voice and Word of God
(3) The Glory of God
(4) The Angel of God
(5) The Spirit of God
(6) The Name of God
(7) Occasional Forms
3. The Names of God
(1) Generic
(2) Attributive
(3) Yahweh
4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God
(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel
(a) His Early Worship
(b) Popular Religion
(c) Polytheistic Tendencies
(i) Coordination
(ii) Assimilation
(iii) Disintegration
(d) No Hebrew Goddesses
(e) Human Sacrifices
God
(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).
The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:
(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.
(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…
This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…
1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…
ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς
1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ
ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
παραδίδωμι is a verb meaning to give or hand over, often with implications of betrayal or transmission. It can refer to delivering someone to judgment or teaching traditions. The New Testament uses it in contexts like committing to prison (e.g., Matthew 4:12) and handing down teachings (e.g., Mark 7:13). The entries suggest a range of meanings from simple delivery to betrayal, but do not indicate significant disagreement among lexicons.
παρα-δίδωμι, subjunc. 3 pers. sing. παραδιδῷ (1 Co. xv. 24 [Lmrg. Tr mrg. WH, cod. Sin., ete.]) and παραδιδοῖ (ibid. L txt. T Trtxt.; cf. Β. 46 (40) [and δίδωμε, init. ]}) ; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρεδίδου (Acts viii. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 23), plur. παρεδίδουν (Acts xvi. 4 RG; xxvii. 1) and παρεδίδοσαν (Acts xvi. 41, T Tr WH; οἵ. W. § 14, 1 ο.; B. 45 (39)); fut. παραδώσω ; 1 aor. παρέδωκα ; 2 aor. παρέδων, subjune. 3 pers. sing. παραδῷ and several times maoadoi (so LT Tr WH in Mk. iv. 29; xiv. 10, 11; Jn. xiii. 2; see δίδωμε, init.); pf. ptep. παραδεδωκώς (Acts xv. 26): plupf. 3 pers. plur. without augm. παραδεδώκεισαν (Mk. | xv. 10; W. 812, 9; [B. 33 (29); Tf. Proleg. p. 120 | sq-]); Pass., pres. παραδίδομαι ; impf. 3 pers. sing. παρε- | 8idero (1 Co. xi. 23 L Τ ΤΥ WH for RK ἃ παρεδίδοτο, see ἀποδίδωμι); pf. 3 pers. sing. mapadedora (Lk. iv. 6), ptep. παραδεδομένος, Acts xiv. 26; 1 aor.…
Read the full entry →παραδίδωμι The verb is common = ‘‘ make allowance for,” especially in leases—P Ryl II. 229! (a.p. 38) παρεδεξάμην σοι πάντα, “1 have given you every allowance’’ (but see Olsson Papyrusbrrefe, p. 81), P Amh II. 8618 (a.p. 78) ἐὰν δέ τις ABpoxo(s) γένηται παραδεχθήσεταί por κατὰ Td ἀνάλογον τοῦ φόρου, ‘if any of the land becomes unwatered, a proportionate allowance from the rent shall be made to me,” P Oxy I. ror (A.p. 142) ἐὰν δέ τις Tots ἑξῆς ἔτεσι ἄβροχος γένηται, παραδεχθήσεται τῷ μεμισθωμένῳ, ‘if in any of the years there should be a failure of water, an allowance shall be made to the lessee” (Edd.), and P Fay 125? (ii/A.D.) τὸ δαπανηθ[ὲν] παραϑέξομαι, “‘T will make allowance for the expense.” For a similar use of subst. παραδοχή see P. Oxy XIV. 165917? (A.D. 218221) with the editors’ note. The verb is also found in receipts, e.g. Prezsigke 3975? (iii/B.C.) παραδέχεται, and BGU VI.…
Read the full entry →παραδίδωμι (paradidōmi) — to deliver.
παραδίδωμι
(late παραδια-δίδω (δειδ-) [Refs 4th c.AD+], give, hand over to another, transmit, [παιδίον] τινί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐντεταλμένα, of couriers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of sentinels, π. τὸν κώδωνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of letters to the person addressed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a purchase to the buyer, [Refs]; of articles entered in an inventory by magistrates, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of an argument, π. τινὶ τὸν ἑξῆς λόγον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὴν προξενίαν hand it down to one's posterity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὴν ἀρετήν transmit, impart as a teacher, [Refs]: with infinitive, παῖδάς σφι παρέδωκε τὴν γλῶσσαν ἐκμαθεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]
Read the full entry →παραδίδωμι
paradidomi
from 3844 and 1325; to surrender, i.e yield up, intrust,
transmit:--betray, bring forth, cast, commit, deliver (up), give
(over, up), hazard, put in prison, recommend.
see GREEK for 3844
see GREEK for 1325
παραδίδωμι
v.
I hand over, deliver, betray
παραδίδωμι paradidōmi 119x
pluperfect, παραδεδώκεισαν (3 pl), to give over, hand over, deliver up, Mt. 4:12; 5:25; 10:4, 17; to commit, intrust, Mt. 11:27; 25:14; to commit, commend, Acts 14:26; 15:40; to yield up, Jn. 19:30; 1 Cor. 15:24; to abandon, Acts 7:42; Eph. 4:19; to stake, hazard, Acts 15:26; to deliver as a matter of injunction, instruction, etc., Mk. 7:13; Read the full entry →
παραδίδωμι fut. -δώσω to give or hand over to another, transmit, τί τινι, Lat. tradere, Hdt.; of transmission to one's successor, id. Hdt.; π. τὴν ἀρετήν to transmit, impart as a teacher, Plat.:—c. inf., π. τινὶ τοὺς νέους διδάσκειν id. Plat.
to give a city or person into another's hands, Hdt.; esp. as an hostage, to deliver up, surrender, Lat. dedere, id. Hdt., Thuc., etc.; also, with notion of treachery, to betray, Xen.: τύχῃ αὑτὸν π. to commit oneself to fortune, Thuc.
to give up to justice, ἑωυτὸν Κροίσῳ Hdt.; τινὰ εἰς τὸν δῆμον Xen.
to hand down legends, opinions, and the like, Lat. memoriae prodere, Dem.
to grant, bestow, κῦδός τινι Pind.:—in pres. and imperf. to offer, allow, αἵρεσιν id. Pind.: c. inf. to allow one to do, Hdt.; so, c. acc. rei, ὁ θεὸς τοῦτό γε οὐ παρεδίδου id.…
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
121 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 55 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 119 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 103 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἐν αἷς ἁπάσαις τὴν ἀρχέτυπον καὶ ἀληθῆ καὶ παραδειγματικὴν μουσικὴν οὐκ ἂν ἁμαρτάνοι τις εἶναι λέγων, ἀφ’ ἧς οἱ μετὰ ταῦτα ἄνθρωποι γραψάμενοι ἐν ταῖς ἑαυτῶν ψυχαῖς τὰς εἰκόνας ἀναγκαιοτάτην καὶ ὠφελιμωτάτην τέχνην τῷ βίῳ παρέδοσαν.
οὐδὲ γὰρ πᾶσαν ἐκεῖνος ἔφθη λαβεῖν τὴν ἀναγραφήν, ἀλλὰ μόνα τὰ τοῦ νόμου παρέδοσαν οἱ πεμφθέντες ἐπὶ τὴν ἐξήγησιν εἰς τὴν Ἀλεξάνδρειαν·
Εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὑπέμεινεν ὁ κύριος παραδοῦναι τὴν σάρκα εἰς καταφθοράν, ἵνα τῇ ἀφέσει τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἁγνισθῶμεν, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ ῥαντίσματος αὐτοῦ.
r Γλαῦκος Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. παρέδωκεν Δημήτριος Σαραπίωνι καὶ Κράτωνι τοῖς Ἀπολλωνίου ταμίαις δορκάδας … λαγοὺς κζ, τούτων τεθνηκότας ιθ,
διάλογον ἐποιησάμην εἰς δραχμὰς υ. τὰ δὲ ὀφειλήματά ἐστιν ἀδύνατα τοὺς ἐν Ἡφαιστιάδι σκορδευτὰς παρέδωκα εἰς τὸ ἐννόμιον καὶ τὰ φορτία αὐτῶν Ἀριστάνδρωι τῶι οἰκονόμωι. Ἐτέαρχος δὲ ἔφη αὑτοῦ
v ἔτους λϛ Ἐπεὶφ δ παρέδωκα Σεμμώνθει· προσκεφάλαια ἀνθεινὰ ζ ἄλλον λευκὸν α, ἄλλον παλαιὸν α γίνονται θ, ἐπικρεμαστὸς ταρσός
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-APM — Personal pronoun · accusative · plural · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-APM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
The Greek word λατρεύω (i.e., *latreuo*) is derived from λάτρις (a hired servant) and primarily means to serve or worship, particularly in a religious context. It encompasses both the service to God and the worship of idols, appearing frequently in the New Testament. The term is closely related to the idea of ministerial service and is often associated with acts of homage and devotion.
In both these words the notion of service lies, but of service under certain special limitations in the second, as compared with the first. Aartpevew, allied to λάτρις, ‘a hired servant,’ Adtpov, ‘hire,’ and perhaps to λεία, Anis (so Curtius), is, properly, ‘ to serve for hire,’ and therefore not of compulsion, as does a slave, though the line of separation between λάτρις and δοῦλος is by no means always observed. Already in classical Greek both it and λατρεία are occasionally transferred from the service of men to the service of the higher powers; as by Plato, Apol. 23 c: ἡ τοῦ Θεοῦ λατρεία: cf. Phedr. 244 e; and Euripides, Troad. 450, where Cassandra is ἡ ᾿Απόλλωνος λάτρις : and a meaning, which in Scripture is the only one, is anticipated in part. In the Septuagint, λατρεύειν never expresses any other service but either that of the true God, or of the false gods of heathenism ; for…
Read the full entry →λατρεύω
(< λάτρις, a hired servant),
[in LXX (always, as λατρεία, of the service of God or of heathen divinities) chiefly for עבד, Ex 3:12, al.; in Da LXX TH (3:12, al.) for פְּלַח;]
to work for hire.
λατρεύω ; fut. λατρεύσω ; 1 aor. eAdrpevoa; (λάτρις ἃ hireling, Lat. /atro in Enn. and Plaut.; λάτρον hire) ; in Grk. writ. a. to serve for hire; b. univ. fo serve, minister to, either gods or men, and used alike of slaves and of freemen; in the N. T. to render religious service or homage, to worship, (Hebr. 123, Deut. vi. 13; x. 12; Josh. xxiv. 15); in a broad sense, λατρ. θεῷ: Mt. iv. 10 and Lk. iv. 8, (after Deut. vi. 13); Acts vii. 7; xxiv. 14; xxvii. 23; Heb. ix.14; Rev. vii.15; xxii. 3; of the worship of idols, Acts vii. 42; Ro. i. 25, (Ex. xx. 5; xxiii. 24; Ezek. xx. 32). Phrases relating to the manner of worshipping are these: θεῷ [so R ΑἸ λατρεύειν | πνεύματι (dat. of instr.), with the spirit or soul, Phil. iii. 3, but LT Tr WH have correctly restored πνεύματι θεοῦ, i. e. prompted by, filled with, the Spirit of God, so that the dat. of the pers. (τῷ θεῷ) is suppressed ; ἐν τῷ…
Read the full entry →λατρεύω in Biblical Greek always refers to the service or worship of the true God or of heathen divinities: see SH on Rom 1°, where the relation of the verb to λειτουργέω is discussed. For its relation to δουλεύω see Thackeray Gy. i. p. 8: cf. also Anz Subsidia, p. 296.
λατρεύω (latreuō) — to minister.
λατρ-εύω,
Elean λατρείω (which see), work for hire or pay, [Refs 6th c.BC+]: to be in servitude, serve, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. λ. τινί to be subject or enslaved to, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with accusative person, serve, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. νόμοις obey, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λ. καιρῷ, = Latin temporibus inservire, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τῷ κάλλει λ. to be devoted to.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. serve the gods with prayers and sacrifices, λ. Φοίβῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+] render due service, [Refs]; πόνον.. τόνδ᾽ ἐλάτρευσα θεᾷ [Refs]
λατρεύω
latreuo
from latris (a hired menial); to minister (to God), i.e. render
religious homage:--serve, do the service, worship(-per).
λατρεύω
v.
I serve, worship
λατρεύω latreuō 21x
to be a servant, to serve, Acts 27:23; to render religious service and homage, worship, Mt. 4:10; Lk. 1:74; spc. to offer sacrifices, present offerings, Heb. 8:5; 9:9
λατρεύω λατρεύω, φυτ. -σω λάτρις to work for hire or pay, to be in servitude, serve, Xen.
λ. τινί to be bound or enslaved to, Soph., Eur., etc.; c. acc. pers. to serve, Eur.:—metaph., λατρ. πέτρᾳ, of Prometheus, Aesch.; μόχθοις λατρ. Soph.; λ. νόμοις to obey, Xen.
to serve the gods, λ. Φοίβῳ Eur.: c. acc. cogn., πόνον λ. to render them due service, id. Eur.
Verb-PAN — Verb · present · active · infinitivepresent active infinitive — an action in progress.
V-PAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5721
wur'-ship (Anglo-Saxon: weorthscipe, wyrthscype, "honor," from weorth, wurth, "worthy," "honorable," and scipe, "ship"):
1. Terms
2. Old Testament Worship
3. New Testament Worship
4. Public Christian Worship
LITERATURE
Honor, reverence, homage, in thought, feeling, or act, paid to men, angels, or other "spiritual" beings, and figuratively to other entities, ideas, powers or qualities, but specifically and supremely to Deity.
1. Terms:
The principal Old Testament word is shachah, "depress," "bow down," "prostrate" (Hithpael), as in Ex 4:31, "bowed their heads and worshipped"; so in 94 other places. The context determines more or less clearly whether the physical act or the volitional and emotional idea is intended. The word is applied to acts of reverence to human superiors as well as supernatural. the Revised Version (British and American)…
Worship
Homage rendered to God which it is sinful (idolatry) to render to any created being (Ex. 34:14; Isa. 2:8). Such worship was refused by Peter (Acts 10:25,26) and by an angel (Rev. 22:8,9).
21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 21 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 44 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„κύριον“ γάρ φησι „τὸν θεόν σου φοβηθήσῃ καὶ αὐτῷ λατρεύσεις καὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν κολληθήσῃ“ (Deut.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word στρατιά (stratia) means 'army' or 'host' and is derived from the base of στρατός (stratos). It encompasses various meanings, including a band of soldiers and figuratively refers to celestial beings like angels or stars. The New Testament uses it to describe the 'heavenly host' in contexts such as Luke 2:13 and Acts 7:42.
στρατιά, -ᾶς, ἡ
[in LXX chiefly for צָבָא ;]
= στρατός, an army, a host: of angels (III Ki 22:19, al.), Lk 2:13; of the stars of heaven (Je 8:2, II Ch 33:3), Ac 7:42.
As sometimes in cl. (poët.), = στρατεία: II Co 10:4, T (WH, RV, στρατεία).†
στρατιά, -Gs, ἡ, (στρατός [οἷ. otparevw]), fr. Aeschyl. and Hat. down, Sept. for RIS; 1. an army, band of soldiers. 2. sometimes in the poets i. q. στρατεία, as Arstph. eqq. 587 (ἐν στρατιαῖς τε καὶ μάχαις), 2 Co. x. 4 Tdf. after the best codd. ({see his note; cf. L. and 8. s. v. II.]; Passow 8. v. στρατεία, fin.). 3. in the N. T. ἡ οὐράνιος στρατιά, or ἡ στρατ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Hebr. Ὁ ΤΊ Ns), the host of heaven (see δύναμις, f.), i. 6. a. troops of angels (1 K. xxii. 19; Neh. ix. 6): Lk.ii.13. — b. the heavenly bodies, stars of heaven, (so called on account of their number and their order): Acts vii. 42 (2 Chr. xxxill. 3,5; Jer. viii. 2, etc.).
στρατια ef. Schiirer Geschichte ii. p. 266 (= H/P Div. II. vol. i. p. 259)), and (2) to the governors or magistrates of the Roman colony at Philippi (Ac 16%“), ΤΕ is doubtful whether the ἄρχοντες of v. 19 and the στρατηγοί of ν. 20 are the same officials according to their Greek or Latin forms of designation, or whether the ἄρχοντες are the chief magisterial authorities and the στρατηγοί, the local magistrates of the town. Ramsay (S¢. Paul, p. 217f.) is inclined to distinguish between them on the ground that a concise writer like Luke would not likely have employed two clauses where one was sufficient. He adds that in the case of the Philippian magistrates the title ‘‘ Praetors” was ‘not but was employed as a ‘‘courtesy (Lk 22,8; technically accurate,” title.” The designation στρατηγός = praetor 15 occurrence in the papyri, and hardly needs illustration, but see P Oxy II. 29419 (A.D.…
Read the full entry →στρατιά (stratia) — army.
στρᾰτιά,
Ionic dialect στρατ-ιή, ἡ,= στρατός, army, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. ναυτική, πεζή, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ναύφρακτος σ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, a land force, as distinguished from seamen, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. generally, host, company, band, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; αἱ σ. τῶν οὐρανῶν[LXX]; = cohors ministrorum, [Refs 4th c.AD+]
II. sometimes ={στρατεία}, expedition, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴτε.. ἐπὶ στρατιάν go.. on service, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
στρατιά
stratia
feminine of a derivative of stratos (an army; from the base of 4766,
as encamped); camp-likeness, i.e. an army, i.e. (figuratively) the
angels, the celestial luminaries:--host.
see GREEK for 4766
στρατιά, ᾶς, ἡ
n.f.
an army, host of angels
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
Host
An entertainer (Rom. 16:23); a tavern-keeper, the keeper of a caravansary (Luke 10:35).
In warfare, a troop or military force. This consisted at first only of infantry. Solomon afterwards added cavalry (1 Kings 4:26; 10:26). Every male Israelite from twenty to fifty years of age was bound by the law to bear arms when necessary (Num. 1:3; 26:2; 2 Chr. 25:5).
Saul was the first to form a standing army (1 Sam. 13:2; 24:2). This example was followed by David (1 Chr. 27:1), and Solomon (
2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οἵ γε μὴν πλάνητες, ἡ ἀντίρροπος στρατιὰ τῇ τῶν ἀπλανῶν, ἑπτὰ διακοσμοῦνται τάξεσι, πλείστην ἐπιδεικνύμενοι συμπάθειαν πρὸς ἀέρα καὶ γῆν·
ἐπὶ τούτους στρατεύσαντες Ἀσσύριοι καὶ μέρη τέσσαρα ποιήσαντες τῆς στρατιᾶς ἐπολιόρκουν αὐτούς·
Φαραὼ καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ αὐτοῦ καὶ πάντες οἱ ἡγούμενοι Αἰγύπτου, τά τε ἅρματα καὶ οἱ ἀνάβαται αὐτῶν οὐ δἰ ἄλλην τινὰ αἰτίαν ἐβυθίσθησαν εἰς θάλασσαν ἐρυθρὰν καὶ ἀπώλοντο, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ σκληρυνθῆναι αὐτῶν τὰς ἀσυνέτους καρδίας μετὰ τὸ γενέσθαι τὰ σημεῖα καὶ…
τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ μου Νείλου υἱοῦ Ἰουλίου Σαβείνου τῶν ἀπὸ λεγιῶνος ὡς δὲ πρὸ τῆς στρατιᾶς … τοῦ καὶ Σαβείνου τοῦ Νείλου υἱοῦ Γαίου Ἰουλίου Ἀπολλιναρίου … … ιτης
δὲ μήτηρ Θερμοῦθις διαθήκας ἔθεντο, ἕκαστος κεχωρισμένως, καὶ οὐδέπω αὐταὶ ἐλύθησαν διὰ τὸ ἐν στρατίᾳ με γεγονέναι περὶ Ἀνθ … διατετρίφθαι ο … … … σων διὰ τῶν διατάξεων
ὑπογεγραμμένον κάτοικον Πτολεμαῖον Διογένους τοῦ … μητρὸς Σύρας τῆς Πτολεμαίου κ … … ἐν στρατιᾷ ἐκτὸς … … … … … χρηματίσαντα Γάιον Οὐαλέριον Καπίτωνα ἐτῶν κθ ἄσημον, ἀπογεγραμμένον
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
οὐρανός (ouranos) means heaven or sky, often referring to both the physical vault above and the spiritual realm where God and angels reside. It is used in various contexts, including the universe and divine authority, appearing frequently in the New Testament. Notably, some lexicons mention its use in a metaphorical sense, while others focus on its physical aspects.
οὐρανός, -οῦ, ὁ,
[in LXX chiefly for שָׁמַיִם (hence, often pl., οἱ οὐ., v. infr.);]
heaven;
of the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky and the aerial regions above the earth: opp. to ἡ γῆ, He 1:10, II Pe 3:5, 10; ὁ οὐ. καὶ ἡ γῆ, i.e. the world, the universe, Mt 5:18, Mk 13:31, Lk 10:21, Ac 4:24, Re 10:6, al.; ἀπ’ ἄκρων οὐ. ἕως ἄ. αὐτῶν (on the absence of art. aft. prep., v. Bl., § 46, 5), Mt 24:31; ὑπὸ τὸν οὐ.,
οὐρανός, -ov, ὁ, [fr.a root meaning ‘ to cover,’ ‘ encompass’; οἵ. Vanicek p. 895; Curtius § 509], heaven; and, in imitation of the Hebr. Οὐ (i.e. prop. the heights above, the upper regions), οὐρανοί, τῶν, οἱ, the heavens [W. § 27, 3; B. 24 (21)], (on the use and the omission of the art. ef. W. 121 (115)), i. 6. 1. the vaulted expanse of the sky with all the things visible in it; a. generally: as opp. to the earth, Heb. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 5, 10, 12; 6 ovp. x. ἡ γῆ, [heaven and earth] i. q. the universe, the world, (ace. to the primitive Hebrew manner of speaking, inasmuch as they had neither the conception nor the name of the universe, Gen. i. 1; xiv. 19; Tob. vii. 17 (18); 1 Mace. ii. 37, ete.) : Mt. v.18; xi. 25; xxiv. 35; Mk. xiii. 81; Lk. x. 21; xvi. 17; xxi. 33; Actsiv. 24; xiv. 15; xvii. 24; Rev. x.6; xiv. 7; xx.11. The ancients conceived of the expanded sky as an arch or yault…
Read the full entry →οὐρανός. For οὐρανός in the wide sense of ‘‘sky,’’ ‘‘heaven,” as opposed to γῆ, “earth,” cf. P Leid G1 (p.c. 181-145) (=I. p. 42), a prayer to the gods that they would grant to Ptolemy Philometor and Berenice—kvprelay τῶν [ὑ]πὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χώρωϊν, ‘‘dominationem terrestrium regionum ” (Ed.), and the magic P Lond 1217 (iii/a.p.) (=I. p. 93) πρὶν γενέσθε (/. γενέσθαι) οὐρανὸν ἢ γῆν ἢ θάλασσαν κτλ. The thought of a series of heavens, as in 2 Cor 12%, may be illustrated from PSI I. 29? (iv/a.p. ἢ) ἐπικαλοῦμέί( = al) σε τὸν καθήμενον ἐν TO πρώτῳ οὐρανῷ .. . ἐν τῷ β οὐρανῷ ... ἐν τῷ Ὑ οὐρανῷ κτλ. Ρ Heid 65 (iv/a.p.) (= Se/ections, p. 126) πιστεύομεν γὰρ τὴν πολιτίαϊν σῆου ἐνν οὐρανῷ is evidently a reminiscence of Phil 4293. On the use of the plur. οὐρανοί in the NT, see Blass Gr. p. 83, and the statistics in Hawkins Hor. Syx.* p. 52f. A new subst. οὐρανουσία occurs in P Lond 1218 (iii/a.p.)…
Read the full entry →οὐρανός (ouranos) — heaven.
οὐρᾰνός, ὁ,
Doric dialect and Boeotian dialect ὠρανός [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ὄρανος (ὀράνω [Refs 7th c.BC+]
I. heaven: in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.1. vault or firmament of heaven, sky, γαῖα.. ἐγείνατο ἶσον ἑαυτῇ οὐρανὸν ἀστερόεντα, ἵνα μιν περὶ πάντα καλύπτοι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; wrapped in clouds, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; above the aether, [Refs 8th c.BC+] continued to regard it as solid (στερέμνιον), [Refs]; defined as αἰθέρος τὸ ἔσχατον by [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἠέλιος δὲ οὐρανοῦ ἐξαπόλωλε, of an eclipse, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. heaven, as the seat of the gods, outside or above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus (see. Ὄλυμπος),[Refs 8th c.BC+]; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ [Refs]; so, later, οἱ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ…
οὐρανός
ouranos
perhaps from the same as 3735 (through the idea of elevation); the
sky; by extension, heaven (as the abode of God); by implication,
happiness, power, eternity; specially, the Gospel
(Christianity):--air, heaven(-ly), sky.
see GREEK for 3735
οὐρανός, οῦ, ὁ
n.m.
the sky, the heaven
οὐρανός ouranos 273x
heaven, the heavens, the visible heavens and all their phenomena, Mt. 5:18; 16:1; 24:29, et al. freq.; the air, atmosphere, in which the clouds and tempests gather, the birds fly, etc., Mt. 6:26; 16:2, 3; heaven as the peculiar seat and abode of God, of angels, of glorified spirits, etc., Mt. 5:34, 45, 48; 6:1, 9, 10; 12:50; Jn. 3:13, 31; 6:32, 38, 41, 42, 50, 51, 58; in NT heaven as a term expressive of the Divine Being, His administration, etc., Mt. 19:14; 21:25; Lk. 20:4, 5; Jn. 3:27
οὐρανός οὐρα^νός, οῦ, ὁ, only in sg. heaven: in Hom. and Hes.,
the vault or firmament of heaven, the sky, conceived as a concave hemisphere resting on the verge of earth, upborne by the pillars of Atlas, Od., Hes., etc.; conceived to be of solid metal, χάλκεος, πολύχαλκος, σιδήρεος, Hom.: on this vault the sun performed his course, Od.; the stars were fixed upon it, and moved with it, for it was supposed to be always revolving, Il.
heaven, as the seat of the gods, above this skyey vault, the portion of Zeus, Hom.; πύλαι οὐρανοῦ Heavengate, which the Hours lifted and put down like a trapdoor, Il.
in common language, heaven, the sky, Hom., etc.; πρὸς οὐρανὸν βιβάζειν τινά to exalt to heaven, as Hor. evehere ad Deos, Soph.; εἰς τὸν οὐρ. ἥλλοντο leapt up on high, Xen.: a region of heaven, climate…
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
hev'-'n.
See ASTRONOMY.
Heaven
(1.) Definitions. The phrase “heaven and earth” is used to indicate the whole universe (Gen. 1:1; Jer. 23:24; Acts 17:24). According to the Jewish notion there were three heavens,
(a) The firmament, as “fowls of the heaven” (Gen. 2:19; 7:3, 23; Ps. 8:8, etc.), “the eagles of heaven” (Lam. 4:19), etc.
(b) The starry heavens (Deut. 17:3; Jer. 8:2; Matt. 24:29).
There are four Hebrew words thus rendered in the Old Testament which we may briefly notice. Raki’a , Authorized Version, firmament. [FIRMAMENT] Shamayim . This is the word used in the expression "the heaven and the earth," or "the upper and lower regions." (Genesis 1:1) Marom , used for heaven in (Psalms 18:16; Isaiah 24:18; Jeremiah 25:30). Properly speaking it means a mountain as in (Psalms 102:19; Ezekiel 17:23) Shechakim , "expanses," with reference to the extent of heaven. (33:26; Job 35:5) St. Paul’s expression "third heaven," (
In the Bible, means primarily the region of the air and clouds, and of the planets and stars, but chiefly the world of holy bliss above the visible heavens. It is called "the third heaven," "the highest heaven," and "the heaven of heavens," expressions nearly synonymous. There holy beings are to dwell, seeing all of God that it is possible for creatures to see. Thither Christ ascended, to intercede for his people and prepare for them a place where all shall at length be gathered, to go no more out forever, Eph 4:10 Heb 8:1 9:24-28.
In this life we can know but little of the location and appearance of heaven, or of the employments and blessedness of its inhabitants. The Scriptures inform us that all sin, and every other evil, are forever excluded; no fruits of sin will be found…
281 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 273 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 305 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Φησὶ δ’ ὡς „ἐν ἀρχῇ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν", τὴν ἀρχὴν παραλαμβάνων | οὐχ ὡς οἴονταί τινες τὴν κατὰ χρόνον·
Ἐν ἀρχῇ ἔκτισεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν.
λέγει γὰρ ἡ γραφὴ περὶ ἡμῶν, ὡς λέγει τῷ υἱῷ: Ποιήσωμεν κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμῶν τὸν ἄνθρωπον, καὶ ἀρχέτωσαν τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς καὶ τῶν πετεινῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων τῆς θαλάσσης.
εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων ἐπὶ
εὐχὰς καὶ θυσίας ἐπιτελῶν διδόναι ὑμῖν ὑγίειαν νίκην κράτος σθένος κυριείαν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν χωρῶν, σκυλλόμενος δὲ καὶ διασειόμενος παρʼ ἕκαστον … εἰκῇ καὶ ὡς ἔτυχεν ὑπό τινων
τραχείας … … … … … … … … ἐκ τοῦ Σῶσις Οὐρανοῦ κλήρου περὶ κώμην ἠξίωσά τέ σε, καὶ ἕξεις γὰρ παραφεῖναι ἑκάστης ἀρούρης πυροῦ καὶ
The Greek word καθώς (kathōs) is an adverb meaning 'just as' or 'according as.' It is built from the roots meaning 'down' and 'as,' and is used to express comparisons, proportions, or conditions. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that clarify or compare actions or states, such as in Luke 1:2 and John 5:23. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.
καθώς, (i.e. καθ’ ὡς), Hellenistic for καθά, q.v., καθάπερ, καθό, καθότι (Mayser, 485; Rutherford, NPhr., 495; Bl., § 78, 1),
according as, even as, just as, as: Lk 1:2 (v.s. καθά), 24:39, Jo 5:23, Ac 7:48, I Co 8:2, Ga 3:6, al.; seq. οὕτως, Lk 11:30, Jo 3:14, II Co 1:5, Col 3:13, I Jo 2:6, al.; seq. καί, Jo 15:9, I Co 15:49, I Jo 2:18, al.; οὕτως . . . κ., Lk 24:24; id. with…
Read the full entry →καθώς (i. 6. καθ᾽ ὡς), a particle found occasionally in prof. auth. fr. Aristot. down for the Attic καθά and καθό, but emphatically censured by Phryn. and the Atticists ; cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. ete. p. 74 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn. Ρ. 425 sq.; [W. 26 (25)]; 1. according as, Just as, even as: in the first member of a comparison, Lk. vi. 31; 1 Jn. ii. 27; foll. by οὕτως in the second member [ef. W. § 53, 5], Lk. xi. 80; xvii. 26; Jn. iii. 14; Qo. 5 xed Col. iii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 6; foll. by καί also, Jn. xv. 9; xvii. 18; xx. 21; 1 Jn. ii. 18; iv.17; 1Co.xv.49; itis annexed to preceding words after the demonstrative οὕτως, Lk. xxiv. 24; with οὕτως unexpressed, Mt. xxi. 6; xxviii. 6; Mk. xvi. 7; Lk. i. 2, 55, 70; xi.1; Jn. i. 23; v. 28; heer 47 [here LT Tr WH ὡς]; xv. 8; Ro.i.13; xv. 7}; 1 Co. viii. 25 x. 6; 2Co.i. 14; ix. 8; xi. 12; Eph. iv. 17, and often; καθὼς διδάσκω, agreeably to my method…
Read the full entry →καθώς. P Oxy X. τ2995 (iv/a.p.) καθὼς ἐνετιλάνμην (1. -ἀμην) σ[ο]ι [περ]ὶ λωβιν μαχερῶν καὶ περὶ πιπεράδιον, ‘do as I told you about the . . . of knives and the pepper” (Edd.) is a good parallel to the construction in 1 Tim 1°. Other exx. of the particle, which is condemned by the Atticists (Lob. Phryn. p. 426), are P Eleph 185 (B.c. 223-2) kaQa[s συντέταῖχεν Μνήσαρχοϊίς, P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθώς ἐστιν ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς, P Oxy ΧΙ]. 1453} (B.c. 30-29) εἶ μὴν προστατήσ{ειν] τοῦ λύχνου τῶν προδεδηλωμέν[ων] ἱερῶν καθὼς πρόκειται, ‘that we will superintend the lamps of the above mentioned temples, as aforesaid” (Edd.), and from the | inserr. A/ichel 230° (ii/B.c. ad fin.) καθὼς Kal πρότερον. MGr…
Read the full entry →καθώς (kathōs) — as/just as.
καθώς,
adverb ={καθά}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; even as, [NT]
2. how, ὑπομιμνῄσκειν κ... Aristeas 263,[NT]
II. of Time, as, when,[LXX+2nd c.AD+]
καθώς
kathos
from 2596 and 5613; just (or inasmuch) as, that:--according to,
(according, even) as, how, when.
see GREEK for 2596
see GREEK for 5613
καθώς
Adv
just as, as
καθώς kathōs 182x
as, just as, in the manner that, Mt. 21:6; 26:24; how, in what manner, Acts 15:14; according as, Mk. 4:33; inasmuch as, Jn. 17:2; of time, when, Acts 7:17
καθώς = καθά, Hdt., NTest.
how, NTest.
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:
(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).
(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).
183 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 179 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
οὐκοῦν κύριος ἀφρόνων ἐπιδέδεικται τὸν ἄρχοντος ἐπανατεινάμενος οἰκεῖον φόβον, θεὸς δὲ βελτιουμένων γράφεται, καθὼς καὶ νῦν·
ὡς δʼ ἧκον εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον, ἀπέβαινε τῷ Ἁβράμῳ καθὼς ὑπενόησε·
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
τὰ γράμματα. Διόσκορος τοῦ δεῖνα δεδάνεικα τὰς τοῦ ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου κεφαλαίου δραχμὰς εἴκοσι τέσσαρες καθὼς πρόκειται … ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Νέρουα Τραιανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Δακικοῦ.
μηδενί. Πακῦσις Πακύσιος ἀπέχω τὰς προκειμένας ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς διακοσίας εἴκοσι τέσσαρας καὶ οὐδὲν ἐνκαλῶ καθὼς πρόκειται. ἐντέτακται διὰ τοῦ ἐν Ἡρακλείᾳ γραφείου.
μητρὸς χωρὶς ἄλλων ἃς ὥφειλεν μοι ὁ ταύτης ἀδελφὸς Στοτοῆτις πρεσβύτερος ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς ἑκατὸν καθὼς πρόκειται. Στοτοῆτις ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ τοῦ πατρός.
γράφω (graphō) primarily means 'to write' and is derived from a sense of scratching or engraving. It encompasses various forms of writing, including inscribing letters, recording information, and expressing content in written form. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as recording scripture (e.g., Matthew 4:4) and writing letters (e.g., Acts 23:25). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
γράφω, [in LXX chiefly for כּתב ];
to scrape, graze (Hom.), and later (Hdt.) to sketch, draw.
to write;
of forming or tracing letters on writing material: Jo 8:[6], Ga 6:11, II Th 3:17;
γράφω ; [impf. ἔγραφον]; fut. γράψω; 1 aor. ἔγραψα; pf. γέγραφα; Pass., [pres. γράφομαι]; pf. γέγραμμαι ; [plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγέγραπτο, Rev. xvii. 8 Lchm.]; 2 aor. ἐγράφην ; (prop. to grave, scrape, scratch, engrave ; ef. Germ. graben, eingraben ; γράψεν δὲ οἱ ὀστέον ἄχρις αἰχμή, Hom. Il. 17, 599; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι, ib. 6, 169; hence to draw letters), towrite; 1. with reference to the form of the letters; to delineate (or form) letters on a tablet, parchment, paper, or other material: τῷ 8aκτύλῳ ἔγραφεν eis τὴν γῆν made figures on the ground, Jn. viii. 6 Rec. ; οὕτω γράφω so am I accustomed to form my letters, 2 Thess. iii. 17; πηλίκοις γράμμασι ἔγραψα with how large (and so, ill-formed [?]) letters I have written, Gal. vi. 11; ef. Winer, Riickert, Hilgenfeld ad loe. [for the views of those who regard éyp. as covering the close of the Ep. only, see Bp. Lghtft. and Mey.; cf. W.…
Read the full entry →γράφω. Deissmann (BS, pp. 112 ff. 249 f.) has shown the widespread juristic_use in the papyri of the ‘* biblical” γέγραπται with reference to the regulative and authoritative character
γράφω (graphō) — to write.
γράφω [ᾰ],
future -ψω[Refs 5th c.BC+]aorist ἔγραψα, Epic dialect γράψα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect γέγραφα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—middle, future γράψομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐγραψάμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, future γρᾰφήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.: aorist ἐγράφην [ᾰ], [Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect γέγραμμαι (also in middle sense, see near the end), 3rd.pers. singular ἔγραπται [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; participle ἐγραμμένος or ἠγρ- [Refs 1st c.AD+]: 3rd.pers. plural γεγράφαται [Refs], Doric dialect γεγράβανται [Refs]: pluperfect ἐγέγραπτο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural ἐγεγράφατο [Refs 8th c.BC+] only in aorist active:—scratch, graze, αἰχμὴ γράψεν οἱ ὀστέον ἄχρις [Refs 8th c.BC+]; γράψας ἐν πίνακι πτυκτῷ θυμοφθόρα πολλά having marked or drawn signs thereon, [Refs]represent by lines, draw, paint, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γῆς περιόδους γ. draw maps, [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →γράφω
grapho
a primary verb; to "grave", especially to write; figuratively, to
describe:--describe, write(-ing, -ten).
γράφω
v.
I write
γράφω graphō 191x
to engrave, write, according to the ancient method of writing on plates of metal, waxes tables, etc., Jn. 8:6, 8; to write on parchment, paper, etc., generally, Mt. 27:37, et al.; to write letters to another, Acts 23:25; 2 Cor. 2:9; 13:10, et al.; to describe in writing, Jn. 1:46; Rom. 10:5; to inscribe in a catalogue, etc., Lk. 10:20; Rev. 13:8; 17:8, et al.; to write a law, command, or enact in writing, Read the full entry →
γράφω Orig. sense, to scratch, scrape, graze, αἰχμὴ γράψεν ὀστέον Il.; σήματα γράψας ἐν πίνακι having scratched marks as tokens on a tablet, id. Il.:—then, to represent by lines drawn, to delineate, draw, paint, Hdt., Aesch.; εἰκὼν γεγραμμένη Ar.: also in Mid., ζῷα γράφεσθαι ῀ ζωγραφεῖν, Hdt.
to express by written characters, to write, τι id. Hdt.; γο. τινά to write a person's name, Xen.; γ. ἐπιστολήν, etc., id. Xen.; γρ. τι εἰς διφθέρας Hdt.
to inscribe, like ἐπιγράφω, γρ. εἰς στήλην Eur., Dem.
to write down, γρ. τινὰ αἴτιον to set him down as the cause, Hdt.
to register, enrol, γρ. τινὰ τῶν ἱππευόντων among the cavalry, Xen.; Κρέοντος προστάτου γεγράψομαι, as a dependent of Creon…
Verb-RPI-3S — Verb · perfect · passive · indicative · third person · singularperfect passive indicative — a past action whose result still stands.
V-RPI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
205 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 31 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 192 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 111 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀποδεῖ γὰρ τὰ μιμήματα τῶν ἀρχετύπων, τὰ δ’ ἀπὸ τῶν μιμημάτων γραφόμενα καὶ πλαττόμενα πολὺ μᾶλλον, ἅτε μακρὰν ἀφεστῶτα τῆς ἀρχῆς·
τὸν μὲν γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς Ῥωμαίους πόλεμον ἡμῖν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις γενόμενον καὶ τὰς ἐν αὐτῷ πράξεις καὶ τὸ τέλος οἷον ἀπέβη πείρᾳ μαθὼν ἐβιάσθην ἐκδιηγήσασθαι διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ γράφειν λυμαινομένους τὴν ἀλήθειαν,
τὸ τέλειον σκάνδαλον ἤγγικεν, περὶ οὖ γέγραπται, ὡς Ἐνὼχ λέγει.
εἰκάδος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἀποτεισάτω καθὰ γέγραπται παραχρῆμα ἐπάναγκον· ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ἀγαθίνωι καὶ Πατῆτι ἐκ τοῦ δεδανεισμένου Πανᾶτος καὶ
καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιῇ καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῷ ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα ἡμιόλιον ἢ τὴν ἐσομένην ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾶι τιμήν,
ιϛ ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι ἢ μὴ ποιήσηι καθὰ γέγραπται ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα τὰ τοῦ σιδήρου μνᾶς δισχιλίας χμ καὶ ἐπίτιμον
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The Greek word βίβλος (i.e., biblos) refers to a book or scroll, derived from the inner bark of the papyrus plant, which was used for writing. It carries a connotation of sacredness and is used in the New Testament to denote scripture, the Book of Life, and other significant texts, appearing in verses like Matthew 1:1 and Philippians 4:3. Some sources note its rare occurrences and its distinction from related terms like βιβλίον.
βίβλος, -ου, ἡ (variant form of βύβλος, the Egyptian papyrus, paper made from its fibrous coat),
[in LXX for סֶפֶר, the form βύβ- being sometimes used;]
a book, a roll, used much less freq. than βιβλίον, and with a "connotation of sacredness and veneration" (MM, Exp., x), Mt 1:1 Mk 12:26, Lk 3:4 20:42 Ac 1:20 7:42 19:19; β. τ. ζωῆς, Phl 4:3, Re 3:5 20:15.†
βίβλος, -ov, 7, (or rather ἡ βύβλος [but the form βίβλ. more com. when it denotes a writing], the plant called papyrus, Theophr. hist. plant. 4, 8, 2 sq.; [Plin. h. n. 13, 11 sq. (21 sq.)]; fr. its bark [rather, the cellular substance of its stem (for it was an endogenous plant) ] paper was made [see Tristram, Nat. Hist. ete. p. 433 sq.; esp. Dureau de la Malle in the Mémoires de I’ Acad. ἃ. Inserr. ete. tom. 19 pt. 1 (1851) pp. 140-183, and (in correction of current misapprehensions) Prof. E. Abbot in the Library Journal for Nov. 1878, p.323 sq., where other reff. are also given ]), a written book, a roll or scroll: Mt. 1.1; Lk. iii. 4; Mk. xii. 26; Acts i. 20; τῆς ζωῆς, Phil. iv. 3; Rev. iii. 5, ete.; see βιβλίον. [From Aeschyl. down. |
βίβλος βίβλος. Nageli (p. 19) well draws attention to the connotation of | sacredness and veneration which always attaches to βίβλος in its rare occurrences. He quotes Lucian, and two papyti, the first of these referring to ‘‘old, wise, that is Chaldaean books,” P Par 19! (A.D. 138) σκεψάμενος ἀπὸ πολλῶν βίβλων ds παρεδόθη ἡμεῖν ἀπὸ σοφῶν ἀρχαίων, τουτέστι | “Χαλδαϊκῶν, and the other to a citation in a mathematical treatise from a book of Hermes, P Oxy III. 4704 (iii/A.p.) βίβλος λέγει κτλ. According to Thackeray (Arist. p. 55 n.1) what seems to be the earliest use of ἡ βίβλος for a collection of sacred writings is to be found in Aristeas 316. In the NT 8. is either Scripture (Mk 1228), or the Book of Life (Phil 4%), or magical writings regarded as highly potent (Ac 19!*), or again a royal pedigree record (Mt 11). In accordance with this is the inscription OG/S 567° (B.c. 239) dv kal τὰ…
Read the full entry →βίβλος (biblos) — book.
Related to: βιβλίον
or βυβλίον, τό, strip of βύβλος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: hence, paper, document, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; β. ἀποστασίου notice of divorce, [NT]
2. ={βιβλίδιον}, petition to the Government, = Latin libellus, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
3. ={δέλτος}, tablet, [LXX]
II. book, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. book as the division of a work, ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ β. [Refs 1st c.AD+]
II.3. τὰ β. place in which books are kept, library, ἀνεθήκατε εἰς τὰ β. [Refs 1st c.AD+]
II.4. τὰ β. τὰ ἅγια the sacred books or [LXX]
βίβλος
biblos
properly, the inner bark of the papyrus plant, i.e. (by implication) a
sheet or scroll of writing:--book.
βίβλος, ου, ἡ
n.f.
a written book, roll, or volume
βίβλος Prob. a foreign word. the inner bark of the papyrus (βύβλος): generally, bark, Plat.
a book, of which the leaves were made of this bark, Dem.
Noun-DSF — Noun · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-DSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
book (cepher; he biblos):
1. Definition
2. Inward Books
3. Publication
(1) Mechanical Copies
(2) Personal Copies
4. Oral Transmission
5. Manuscripts
(1) Epigraphy
(2) Sphragistics
(3) Numismatics
(4) Diplomatics
(5) Paleography
6. Printed Books
7. Variations
8. Textual Criticism
9. Higher Criticism
10. Literary Criticism
11. Origin of New Forms
12. Survival
13. Book Collections
14. Early History of Books in Bible Lands
LITERATURE
A book is any record of thought in words. It consists of a fixed form of words embodied in some kind of substance.
1. Definition:
The form of words is the main factor, but it has no existence without the record. The kind of record is indifferent; it may be carved on stone, stamped on clay, written or printed on vellum, papyrus or paper, or only stamped on the mind of author or hearer, if so be it keeps the words in fixed form. Looked on as a form of words the book is called a work, and…
Book
This word has a comprehensive meaning in Scripture. In the Old Testament it is the rendering of the Hebrew word sepher, which properly means a “writing,” and then a “volume” (Ex. 17:14; Deut. 28:58; 29:20; Job 19:23) or “roll of a book” (Jer. 36:2, 4).
Books were originally written on skins, on linen or cotton cloth, and on Egyptian papyrus, whence our word “paper.” The leaves of the book were generally written in columns, designated by a Hebrew word properly meaning “doors” and “valves” (Jer. 36:23, R.V., marg. “columns”).
[WRITING]
Several sorts of materials were anciently used in making books. Plates of lead or copper, the bark of trees, brick, stone, and wood, were originally employed to engrave such things and documents upon as men desired to transmit to posterity, De 27:2,3 Job 19:23,24. God’s laws were written on stone tablets. Inscriptions were also made on tiles and bricks, which were afterwards hardened by fire. Many of these are found in the ruins of Babylon. Tablets of wood, box, and ivory were common among the ancients: when they were of wood only, they were oftentimes coated over with wax, which received the writing inscribed on them with the point of a style, or iron pen, Jer 17:13; and what was written might be effaced by the broad end of…
10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 10 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„Αὕτη ἡ βίβλος γενέσεως οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς ὅτε ἐγένετο, ᾗ ἡμέρᾳ ἐποίησεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ πᾶν χλωρὸν ἀγροῦ πρὸ τοῦ γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ πάντα χόρτον ἀγροῦ πρὸ τοῦ ἀνατεῖλαι“ (Gen.
περιέχει ἡ βίβλος χρόνον ἐτῶν ὡς Ἰώσηπος ͵γη, Ἑβραῖοι ͵αωοβ, Εὐσέβιος ͵γυνθ.
καὶ εἶπεν Μωϋσῆς: Μηδαμῶς, κύριε: ἄφες τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ, ἢ κἀμὲ ἐξάλειψον ἐκ βίβλου ζώντων.
Ἀφροδισίωι Ζωίλου ἐκλήμπτορι βίβλου Ἰουλίας Σεβαστῆς καὶ τέκνων Γερμανικοῦ Καίσαρος παρὰ Ἁρθώιτου τοῦ Μαρρείους. ἐπιχωρηθέντος μοι βίβλον φέρειν
v ὑγροῦ λίτρον ξηρᾶς ὀβολ ιϛ ἀλιχευτρίδος σιλελια ἀποσφηνομα … βίβλους ὀβολ β ἰρια ξηρομύρου μύρου Κοπρῆτος ὀστοινα
καὶ Θέωνι μισθωταῖς δρυμῶν καὶ ἐρήμου αἰγιαλοῦ Πολέμωνος μερίδος Πετεσοῦχος Πετεσούχου ἱερεὺς Τεπτύνεως τιμὴν βίβλου μυριάδων δύο ἐν Ἰβίωνι Ἀργαίου εἰς Τεπτῦνιν ἄρας διὰ Ἡρακλείδου ἀδελφοῦ Ἀμμωνίου.
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word προφήτης (i.e., *prophētēs*) means 'prophet' and is derived from roots meaning 'to speak forth.' It refers to someone who interprets the divine will, often predicting future events. In the New Testament, it encompasses Old Testament prophets, John the Baptist, and Christian prophets, highlighting their role as inspired teachers and speakers of God's messages.
προφήτης, -ου, ὁ [< πρόφημι, to speak forth),
[in LXX chiefly for נָבִיא;]
one who acts as an interpreter or forth-teller of the Divine will (v. Lft., Notes, 83 f.; Tr., Syn., § vi), a prophet;
in cl. (Æsch., Hdt., Plat., al.), of the interpreters of oracles.
In NT,
of the OT prophets: Mt 5:12, Mk 6:15, Lk 4:27, Jo 8:52, Ro 11:3, al.;
προφήτης, -ov, 6, (πρόφημι, to speak forth, speak out; hence prop. ‘one who speaks forth’; see πρό, ἃ. a.), Sept. - = . for w2) (which comes fr. the same root as (Gs: ‘to divulge,’ ‘make known,’ ‘announce’ [ef. Fleischer in Delitzsch, Com. τι. d. Gen., 4te Aufl. p. 551 sq.], therefore prop. i. q. interpreter, Ex. vii. 1, ef. iv. 16; hence an inlerpreter or spokesman for God; one through whom God speaks; cf. esp. Bleek, Einl. in ἃ. A. T. 4te Aufl. p. 309 [Β. Ὁ. s. v. Prophet and reff. there; esp. also Day’s note on Oehler’s O. T. Theol. § 161, and W. Robertson Smith, Prophets of Israel, p. 389 (note on Lect. ii.)]), one who speaks forth by divine inspiration; I. In Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl., Hdt., and Pind. down 1. an interpreter of oracles (whether uttered by the gods or the μάντεις), or of other hidden things. 2. a foreteller, soothsayer, seer. II. In the N. T. 1. one who, moved by the…
Read the full entry →προφήτης. OGIS 11118 shows us a προφήτης in Upper Egypt in ii/B.c. ; and in Sy/J 790 (=*1157)* (c. B.C. 100?), a procession is ordered in honour of the oracle of Apollo Coropaeus (Corope in the Pagasaean Gulf). The procession is formed of an elected ἱερεύς of Apollo, one each from the colleges of στρατηγοί and νομοφύλακες, one of the πρυτάνεις and a ταμίας, preceding τὸν γραμματέα τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τὸν προφήτην. The prophet is the interpreter of the oracle—‘‘ the composer’’ would come nearer to fact—and the γραμματεύς takes down the response he dictates. See also the list of religious officials in the Canopic Decree OGIS 56% (B.c. 238) (cf. the Rosetta stone 72. 90°—B.c. 196) οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς Kal προφῆται καὶ οἱ εἰς τὸ ἄδυτον εἰσπορευόμένοι πρὸς τὸν στολισμὸν τῶν θεῶν καὶ οἱ πτεροφόραι καὶ ἱερογραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ἱερεῖς. Dittenberger notes adl. that the προφῆται are ‘‘interpretes oraculorum…
Read the full entry →προφήτης (prophētēs) — prophet.
προφήτ-ης, ου,
Doric dialect and Boeotian dialect προφάτας [ᾱ], α, [Refs 6th c.BC+] (πρό, φημί):— properly one who speaks for a god and interprets his will to man, Διὸς π. interpreter, expounder of the will of Zeus, of Tiresias, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Βάκχου π., perhaps of Orpheus, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; [Διονύσου] π., of the Bacchae, [Refs]; Νηρέως π., of Glaucus, [Refs]; especially of the Delphic Apollo, Διὸς π. ἐστὶ Λοξίας πατρός [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of the minister and interpreter at Delphi, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; at the Ptoön,[Refs 2nd c.BC+]; compare προφῆτις.
2. title of official keepers of the oracle at Branchidae, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; elsewhere, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
προφήτης
prophetes
from a compound of 4253 and 5346; a foreteller ("prophet"); by
analogy, an inspired speaker; by extension, a poet:--prophet.
see GREEK for 4253
see GREEK for 5346
προφήτης, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a prophet, poet
προφήτης prophētēs 144x
pr. a spokesman for another; spc. a spokesman or interpreter for a deity; a prophet, seer, Tit. 1:12; in NT a prophet, a divinely commissioned and inspired person, Mt. 14:5; Lk. 7:16, 39; Jn. 9:17; a prophet in the Christian church, a person gifted for the exposition of divine truth, 1 Cor. 12:28, 29; a prophet, a foreteller of the future, Mt. 1:22, et al. freq.; οἱ προφῆται, the prophetic scriptures of the Old Testament, Lk. 16:29
προφήτης πρόφημι one who speaks for a God and interprets his will to man, a prophet; so Teiresias is πρ. Διός, Jove's interpreter, Pind.; and of Apollo, Διὸς προφήτης ἐστὶ Λοξίας πατρός Aesch.; while the Pythia, in turn, became the προφῆτις of Apollo, Hdt.; so Poets are called οἱ τῶν Μουσῶν προφῆται interpreters of the Muses, Plat.
generally, an interpreter, declarer, ἐγὼ πρ. σοι λόγων γενήσομαι Eur.; so, the bowl is called κώμου προφάτης, Pind.
in NTest.,
one who possesses the gift of προφητεία, an inspired preacher and teacher.
the revealer of God's counsel for the future, a prophet (in the modern sense of the word), a predicter of future events.
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
A class of men of God, especially in the Old Testament dispensation, inspired to foretell future and secret events; and who also revealed he will of God as to current events and duties, and were his ambassadors to men. But the word is sometimes used in a wider sense; thus Aaron was Moses; prophet, Ex 7:1, appointed to deliver to the people the messages that Moses received from God; the sacred musicians are said to prophecy, 1Ch 25:1; and Paul gives the name, according to the custom of the Greeks, to the poet Aratus, "a prophet of their own," Tit 1:12. Scripture does not withhold the name of prophet from impostors, although they falsely boasted of inspiration. As true prophets, when filled y the energy of God’s Spirit, were…
149 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 144 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 155 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ ὅτε Ἀαρὼν ὁ λόγος καὶ Μαριὰμ ἡ αἴσθησις ἐπανίστανται, ῥητῶς ἀκούουσιν ὅτι, „ἐὰν γένηται προφήτης κυρίῳ, ἐν ὁράματι αὐτῷ γνωσθήσεται“ καὶ ἐν σκιᾷ ὁ θεός, οὐκ ἐναργῶς, Μωυσεῖ δέ, ὅστις „πιστὸς ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ, στόμα κατὰ στόμα λαλήσει, ἐν εἴδει…
Κλεόδημος δέ φησιν ὁ προφήτης ὁ καὶ Μάλχος ἱστορῶν τὰ περὶ Ἰουδαίων, καθὼς καὶ Μωυσῆς ἱστόρησεν ὁ νομοθέτης αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς Κατούρας Ἁβράμῳ ἐγένοντο παῖδες ἱκανοί.
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
αἴθριον καὶ τόπους ψιλοὺς ἀπὸ νότου τῆς οἰκίας πατρικοὺς αὐτοῦ παρὰ Χαιρήμονος τοῦ Ἡρώδου προφήτου Σούχου θεοῦ μεγάλου Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ εὐδοκούσης τῆς τούτου γυναικὸς Τομσάιος, καὶ ἐθέμην διὰ Σωκράτους
ψιλῶν τόπων τοῦ προφήτου καθοριζομένου τοὺς πεπραμένους ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ τόπους ἐπικεκρατῆσθαι ὑπὸ τε τοῦ πατρὸς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῶν
νεωτέρου τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ἀγοράσαντα τῶι μα ἔτει οἰκίαν ἀδέσποτον παρὰ τοῦ προφήτου προσανειληφέναι τῶι μγ ἔτει Καίσαρος ἑτέρους ψιλοὺς τόπους ἀδεσπότους. τὸν αὐτὸν εἰσέδωκεν Νεστνῆφις. σημανθέντος
μή (mē) is a Greek negative particle used to express subjective negation, often in conditional or hypothetical contexts. It contrasts with οὐ (ou), which indicates absolute denial. μή can function as an adverb meaning 'not' or as a conjunction meaning 'lest.' It appears in various grammatical constructions, including prohibitions and deliberative questions, and is referenced in verses like Matthew 5:29 and John 3:18.
μή,
subjective negative particle,
used where the negation depends on a condition or hypothesis, expressed or understood, as distinct from οὐ, which denies absolutely. μή is used where one thinks a thing is not, as distinct from an absolute negation. As a general rule, οὐ negatives the indic., μή the other moods, incl, ptcp. [In LXX for אֵין, אַיִן, אַל.]
As a neg. adv., not;
with ref. to thought or opinion: Jo 3:18, Tit 1:11, II Pe 1:9.
μή, Sept. for Ox, |X, PN, ἃ particle of negation, which differs from οὐ (which is always an adverb) in that ov denies the thing itself (orto speak technically, denies simply, absolutely, categorically, directly, objectively). but μή denies the thought of the thing, or the thing according to the judgment, opinion, will, purpose, preference, of some one (hence, as we say technically, indirectly, hypothetically, subjectively). This distinction holds also of the compounds οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, ete. But pris either an ad verb of negation, not (Lat. non, ne); or aconjunction, that... not, lest, (Lat. ne); or an interrogative particle, (Lat. num) [i. e. (generally) implying aneg. ans.; in indir. quest. whether nol (suggesting apprehension) ]. Cf. Herm. ad Vig. § 267 p- 802 sqq-; Matthiae § 608; Bitm. Gram. § 148 (cf. Alex. Bttm. N. T. Gr. p. 344 (296) sqq.); Kiihner ii. §§ 512 sq. p.…
Read the full entry →μή Grenf II. 384 (mid. 1.8.6.) καλῶς οὖ]ν ποιήσις μὴ ἀμελήσ[α]ς α[. . ἀγο]ράσαι. .. , P Oxy I. 3815 (a.p. 49--50) (= Selections, p. 53) τοῦ δὲ Σύρου μὴ βουλομένου ἐνμεῖναι τοῖς κεκριμένοις, “45 Syrus does not wish to abide by what has been decided,” 2d. II. 2755 (A.D. 66) (= Selections, p. 58) ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ μὴ ἰδότος γράμματα, “1 wrote for him seeing that he was unlettered,” BGU I. 22° (a.p. 114) (= Selections, p. 74) TappovOios . . . τὸ παρὸν μὴ ἔχουσα κύριον, ‘ Tarmuthis at present without a guardian,’ and P Grenf II. 779 (iii/iv A.D.) (= Sedections, p. 120) θαυμάζω πάνυ [ὅτι] ἀλόγως ἀπέστητε μὴ ἄραντες [τὸ σ]ῶμα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ ὑμῶν, “1 wonder exceedingly that you went off so unreasonably, without taking the body of your brother”; cf. P Tor 1. 1¥8-4 (νον 116) εἰ δὲ kal τις θείηι τὸ μὴ ὄν (cf. 1 Cor 1°8)—acc. and inf. follow, P Ryl II. 144°? (Α.Ὁ. 38) ἐπαγαγεῖν αἰτίας τοῦ μὴ ὄντος, ‘‘…
Read the full entry →μή (mē) — not.
μή,
Elean μά [ᾱ] [Refs 6th c.BC+]. (Cf. Sanskrit mā´, Armenian mi [from I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] mē´], negative used in prohibitions):—not, the negative of the will and thought, as οὐ of fact and statement; μή rejects, οὐ denies; μή is relative, οὐ absolute; μή subjective, οὐ objective. (A few examples of μηδέ and μηδείς have been included.)
__A in INDEPENDENT sentences, used in expressions of will or wish, command, entreaty, warning,
__A.1 with present imperative, 2 person, μή μ᾽ ἐρέθιζε [Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely with aorist imperative, μὴ.. ἔνθεο τιμῇ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect, μὴ ψεῦσον, ὦ Ζεῦ, τῆς.. ἐλπίδος [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect imperative [Refs 8th c.BC+] person when perfect = present, μὴ κεκράγετε [Refs 5th c.BC+]
μή
me
a primary particle of qualified negation (whereas 3756 expresses an
absolute denial); (adverb) not, (conjunction) lest; also (as an
interrogative implying a negative answer (whereas 3756 expects an
affirmative one)) whether:--any but (that), X forbear, + God forbid, +
lack, lest, neither, never, no (X wise in), none, nor, (can-)not,
nothing, that not, un(-taken), without. Often used in compounds in
substantially the same relations. See also 3362, 3363, 3364, 3372,
3373, 3375, 3378.
see GREEK for 3756
see GREEK for 3362
see GREEK for 3363
see GREEK for 3364
see GREEK for 3372
see GREEK for 3373
see GREEK for 3375
see GREEK for 3378
μή
Neg.prt.
not, lest
μή mē 1x
a negative particle, can function as a conj, not, for the particulars of its usage, especially as distinguished from that of οὐ, consult a grammar; as a conj., lest, that not, Mt. 5:29, 30; 18:10; 24:6; Mk. 13:36; μή, or μήτι, or μήποτε, when prefixed to an interrogative clause, it expresses an intimation either of the reality of the matters respecting which the question is asked, Mt. 12:23; or the contrary, Jn. 4:12
Particle-N — Particle · negativeparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative
1,085 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,060 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 1,321 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
σφάγιον is a neuter noun meaning a victim or offering for slaughter, derived from the root related to sacrifice. It appears in contexts referring to sacrificial victims, notably in Acts 7:42. The term is often used in the plural form in classical literature, indicating multiple victims or offerings.
σφάγιον, -ου, τό
(< σφαγή),
[in LXX: Am 5:25 (זֶבַח), Ez 21:10, 15, 28 (טֶבַח), Le 22:23 (נְדָבָה) * ;]
a victim for slaughter: Ac 7:42 (LXX).†
σφάγιον, -ov, τό, (σφαγή). fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down, that which is destined for slaughter, a victim [A.V. slain beast]: Acts vii. 42 [ef. W. 512 (477)] (Am. v. 25 ; Ezek. xxi. 10).
σφάγιον (sphagion) — sacrificial victim.
σφᾰγ-ιον, τό,
victim, offering, σφάγιον ἔθετο ματέρα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἑαυτὰς ἔδοσαν σφάγιον τοῖς πολίταις ὑπὲρ τῆς χώρας [Refs 4th c.BC+]: mostly in plural, σφάγια παρθένους κτανεῖν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σ. ἔρδειν, τέμνειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ σ. δέξαι, addressed to a goddess, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. in [Refs 5th c.BC+] also, slaughter, sacrifice, δοῦλα σφάγια [Refs]
σφάγιον
sphagion
neuter of a derivative of 4967; a victim (in sacrifice):--slain beast.
see GREEK for 4967
σφάγιον, ου, τό
n.n.
a slaughtered victim
σφάγιον sphagion 1x
a victim slaughtered in sacrifice, offering, Acts 7:42*
σφάγιον σφά^γιον, ου, τό, σφάζω a victim, offering, Soph., Eur.: —mostly in pl., Hdt., Aesch., etc.
slaughter, sacrifice, in pl., Eur.
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
This word, used in contradistinction to man, denotes all animals besides, Ps 36:6, sometimes it means quadrupeds, and not creeping things, Le 11:2-7; and sometimes domestic cattle, in distinction from wild creatures, Ge 1:25. They were all brought to Adam to be named. Few are mentioned in the Bible but such as lived in Palestine and the countries adjacent. Beasts suffer with man under the penalties of the fall, Ge 3:14 Ex 9:6 3:15 Eze 38:20 Ho 4:3. Yet various merciful provision for them were made in the Jewish law…
→ See ANIMALS
- Created by God
Ge 1:24,25; 2:19
- Creation of, exhibits God's power
- Made for the praise and glory of God
- Differ in flesh from birds and fishes
- Herb of the field given to, for food
1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
κριὸν δ’ εἶναι καὶ τούτῳ διείρηται σφάγιον, καθὰ καὶ τῷ πρὸς τὰ ἅγια πλημμελήσαντι·
ἐφυλάχθη δὲ ὁ μὲν τῷ θριάμβῳ σφάγιον, ὁ δʼ Ἰωάννης δεσμοῖς αἰωνίοις.
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word θυσία (thusia) means 'sacrifice' and can refer to both the act of sacrificing and the victim offered. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to offerings made to God (e.g., Mt 9:13, Eph 5:2, Heb 10:5). The term is derived from θύω (thuo), which means 'to sacrifice'.
θυσία, -ας, ἡ
(θύω),
[in LXX chiefly for מִנְחָה, זֶבַח;]
actively, an offering, sacrifice (Hdt., al.).
θυσία, -as, ἡ, (θύω), [fr. Aeschyl. down], Sept. for m3) an offering, and Ni; @ sacrifice, victim; a. prop.: Mt. ix. 13 and xii. 7, fr. Hos. vi. 6; Mk. ix. 49 ({RGLTr txt. br.], see ἁλίζω) ; Eph. v. 2; Heb. x. 5, 26; plur., Mk. xii. 33; Lk. xiii. 1; Heb. ix. 23; [x.1,8 (here Ree. sing.) ]; ἀνάγειν θυσίαν τινί, Acts vii. 415 avaφέρειν, Heb. vii. 27, (see ἀνάγω, and ἀναφέρω 2); [δοῦναι θ. Lk. ii. 24]; προσφέρειν, Acts vii. 42; Heb. v. 1; viii. 3; x. [11], 12; [xi 4]; pass. Heb. ix. 9; διὰ τῆς θυσίας αὐτοῦ, by his sacrifice, i. e. by the sacrifice which he offered (not, by offering up himself; that would have been expressed by διὰ τῆς θυσίας τῆς ἑαυτοῦ, or διὰ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ θυσίας), Heb. ix. 26; ἐσθίειν τὰς θυσίας, to eat the flesh left over from the victims sacrificed (viz. at the sacrificial feasts; cf. [Lev. vii. 15 sqq.; Deut. xii. 7 sq. 17 sq., ete.] Win. RWB. s. v. Opfermahlzeiten), 1…
Read the full entry →θυσία (thusia) — sacrifice.
θῠσί-α,
Ionic dialect -ιη, ἡ, (θύω) properly burnt-offering, sacrifice, mostly in plural, variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θυσίας ἔρδειν, ἐπιτελέειν, ἀνάγειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θ. σωτηρίου, αἰνέσεως, τῆς τελειώσεως, [LXX]; of the gods, θυσίαν δέχεσθαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. mode of sacrifice, θ. ἡ αὐτὴ πᾶσι κατέστηκε [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. festival, at which sacrifices were offered, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; περὶ τῶν ἐν Ῥόδῳ θ., title of work by Theognis Hist.
3. b generally, rite, ceremony, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
II. victim, offering, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
θυσία
thusia
from 2380; sacrifice (the act or the victim, literally or
figuratively):--sacrifice.
see GREEK for 2380
θυσία, ας, ἡ
n.f.
a sacrifice
θυσία thusia 28x
sacrifice, the act of sacrificing, Heb. 9:26; the thing sacrificed, a victim, Mt. 9:13; 12:7; the flesh of victims eaten by the sacrificers, 1 Cor. 10:18; in NT an offering or service to God, Phil. 4:18
θυσία θυ^σία, ἡ, θύω1 an offering or mode of offering, Hdt.
in pl. offerings, sacrifices, sacred rites, Batr., Hdt., attic; θυσίῃσι (ionic dat. pl.) ἱλάσκεσθαι τὸν θεόν Hdt.; θυσίας ἕρδειν, ἐπιτελέειν, ἀνάγειν id. Hdt.; of the gods, θυσίαν δέχεσθαι Aesch.
a festival, at which sacrifices were offered, Plat.
the victim or offering itself, Luc.
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
29 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 28 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 240 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„τὸ γὰρ στηθύνιον“ φησί „τοῦ ἐπιθέματος καὶ τὸν βραχίονα τοῦ ἀφαιρέματος εἴληφα παρὰ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἀπὸ τῶν θυσιῶν τοῦ σωτηρίου ὑμῶν, καὶ ἔδωκα αὐτὰ Ἀαρὼν καὶ τοῖς υἱοῖς αὐτοῦ“ (Lev.
ὁ δὲ θεὸς ταύτῃ μᾶλλον ἥδεται τῇ θυσίᾳ τοῖς αὐτομάτοις καὶ κατὰ φύσιν γεγονόσι τιμώμενος, ἀλλʼ οὐχὶ τοῖς κατʼ ἐπίνοιαν ἀνθρώπου πλεονέκτου βίᾳ πεφυκόσιν.
πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:
ι … … πάροδος … … πάροδος … … κ … λουν … θυσία ἐπιτελεῖται
τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν θυσιῶν ᾑρημένοις παρὰ Αὐρηλίας Λευλίδος Α … … νος ἀπὸ κώμης Εὐημερίας τῆς Θεμίστου μερίδος.
τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν θυσιῶν ᾑρημένοις παρὰ Αὐρηλίας Ταλίμμεως καὶ Σοῦ θυγατρός. ἀεὶ θύουσαι τοῖς θεοῖς διετελέσαμεν καὶ νῦν
προσφέρω is a verb meaning 'to bring to' or 'to offer,' often in the context of presenting gifts or sacrifices to God. It combines the elements of bringing something near and offering it, applicable in various contexts such as offerings in worship (e.g., Matthew 2:11) and dealing with others (Hebrews 12:7). The word appears frequently in the New Testament and is rooted in both classical and biblical Greek.
προσ-φέρω,
[in LXX chiefly for קרב hi.;]
to bring to, lead to: c. acc. et dat. pers., Mt 4:24 8:16 9:2, 32 14:35 17:16, Mk 2:4 (WH, R, txt.; sc. αὐτόν) 10:13, Lk 18:15 23:14; pass., Mt 12:22 (act., WH, txt.) 18:24 (προσήχθη, WH) 19:13; c. acc. rei, Mt 25:20; id. c. dat. pers., Mt 22:19, Lk 23:36; τ. στόματι, Jo 19:29; metaph., c. dat pers., to deal with, He 12:7 (cl.).
Read the full entry →προσ-φέρω; impf. προσέφερον; 1 aor. προσήνεγκα ; 2 aor. προσήνεγκον; pt. προσενήνοχα (Heb. xi. 17); Pass., pres. προσφέρομαι; 1 aor. προσηνέχθην ; [see reff. s. v. φέρω]; fr. [Pind.], Aeschyl., and Hdt. down; Sept. often for 277, also for #37, 0.21, ete., sometimes also for TIT where offering sacrifices is spoken of (as 1 Κα. xviii. 36 Compl.; 2 Chr. xxix. 7; Jer. xiv. 12); 1. to bring lo, lead to: twa τινι, one to a person who can heal him or is ready to show him some other kindness, Mt. iv. 24; viii. 16; ix. 2,32; xiv. 35; xvii. 16; Mk. ii. 4 (se. τινά) x WH Tr mrg.; x. 13; Lk. xviii. 15; pass. in Mt. xii. 22 [where L WH txt. act.]; xviii. 24 R GT; xix. 13; — one to a person who is to judge him: Lk. xxiii. 14; τινὰ ἐπὶ Tas συναγωγὰς καὶ Tas ἀρχάς, Lk. xii. 11 [W. § 52, 3] (where T Tr txt. WH εἰσφέρωσιν). προσφέρω τι, to bring or present a thing, Mt. xxv. 20; τί τινι, to reach or hand…
Read the full entry →προσφέρω, “bring to,” “‘ present,’’ is seen in P Fay 2117 (a.p. 134) τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες o[t]s ὀφίλουσιν, ““ presenting their accounts to their creditors,” P Giss I. κοὐδ (a.p. 259) προσφέρων τῇ πόλει... δραχμὰς δεκαεπτὰ ὀβολόν, and P Meyer 23% (end iv/A.D.) παρὰ Τιθοῆτι τῷ προσφέροντί σοι ταῦτά pov τὰ γράμματα: cf. P Par 63!% (B.c. 164) (= P Petr IIL. p. 18) καλῶς ποιήσεις τὴν πᾶσαν προσενεγκάμενος ἐκτένειαν, ‘“‘you will do well in using every effort” (Mahaffy), and P Tebt I. 3318 (B.c. 112) (=Se/ections, p- 31) τὴν πᾶσαν προσενέγκαι σπουδήν. The force seen in Heb 127 appears in P Par 4659 (8.6. 152) (= UPZ i. p. 338) where Apollonius appeals to his brother Ptolemaeus to examine personally into his grievance against a third party—vopitw γὰρ μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων παρακολουθήκοντά σε τῆι ἀληθείαι πικρότερον προσενεχθήσεσθ᾽ αὐτῶι, “‘when you have investigated the truth you will deal with…
Read the full entry →προσφέρω (prospherō) — to bring to.
προσφέρω
(once ποσφέρω, which see), Doric dialect ποτιφέρω Prov. cited in [Refs 1st c.AD+]: future
__A προσοίσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist προσένεικα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect aorist passive προσηνείχθην [Refs]:—bring to or upon, apply to, π. πύργοισι κλιμάκων προσαμβάσεις [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηχανὰς [τοῖσι τείχεσι] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. νόμον, ψήφισμα πρὸς τὴν συγγραφήν bring to bear against.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but χέρα τινὶ προσενεγκεῖν lay hands upon.. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς, in hostile sense, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (but also in a friendly relation, [Refs 5th c.BC+] {προσφεύγω}, and in supplication to the gods, hold out one's hands to, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀνάγκην or ἀναγκαίην τισὶ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so of surgical or medical treatment, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πταρμὸν [τῇ λυγγί] [Refs 5th…
προσφέρω
prosphero
from 4314 and 5342 (including its alternate); to bear towards, i.e.
lead to, tender (especially to God), treat:--bring (to, unto), deal
with, do, offer (unto, up), present unto, put to.
see GREEK for 4314
see GREEK for 5342
προσφέρω
v.
I bring to, offer
προσφέρω prospherō 47x
to bear or bring to, Mt. 4:24; 25:20; to bring to or before magistrates, Lk. 12:11; 23:14; to bring near to, apply to, Jn. 19:29; to offer, tender, proffer, as money, Acts 8:18; to offer, present, as gifts, oblations, etc., Mt. 2:11; 5:23; Heb. 5:7; to offer in sacrifice, Mk. 1:44; Lk. 5:14; to offer up any one as a sacrifice to God, Heb. 9:25, 28; 11:17; mid. to bear one’s…
Read the full entry →προσφέρω doric ποτι-φέρω fut. προσοίσω ionic aor. pass. -ενείχθην to bring to or upon, apply to, Lat. applicare, Hdt., Eur., etc.; but, πρ. χεῖρά τινι to lay hands upon one, Pind.; also to offer one's hand, as a friend, Xen.:—without dat. to apply, exhibit, employ, use, βίην Hdt.; πρ. τόλμαν to bring it to bear, Pind.: also, πρ. πόλεμον Hdt.
to add, τί τινι Soph., Eur.; τι πρός τι Hdt.
to present, offer, give, λουτρὰ πατρί Soph.; δῶρα Thuc.; θυσίας NTest.
esp. of meat and drink, to offer, to set before one, Xen.; πρ. τινὶ ἐμπιεῖν καὶ φαγεῖν id. Xen.
to bring forward, quote, cite, Pind.
to bring forward proposals, make an offer, πρ. λόγον or λόγους τινι Hdt., Thuc.: absol., πρ. περὶ ὁμολογίας Hdt., Thuc.
Verb-AAI-2P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · second person · pluralaorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-AAI-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Plural
48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 109 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τὰς δὲ γοητείας καὶ ἀπάτας αὑτῆς ἡδονὴ τῷ μὲν ἀνδρὶ οὐ τολμᾷ προσφέρειν, τῇ δὲ γυναικὶ καὶ διὰ ταύτης ἐκείνῳ, πάνυ προσφυῶς καὶ εὐθυβόλως·
καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.
λέγει δὲ πάλιν πρὸς αὐτούς: Μὴ ἐγὼ ἐνετειλάμην τοῖς πατράσιν ὑμῶν ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, προσενέγκαι μοι ὁλοκαυτώματα καὶ θυσίας;
τοῦ νῦν καὶ ταῖς προγεγραμμέναις ἑαυτοῦ θυγατράσι Ταμαρῆτι καὶ Θαυβάστι, τῇ μὲν Ταμαρῆτι ἃς προσενήνοχεν αὐτῇ ἔτι πάλαι ὁ αὐτὸς Ψύφις ὃς καὶ Ἁρποχρατίων, διʼ ἧς ἔθετο ἡ Ταμαρῆς
συνγραφὴν γάμου τελειωθεῖσαν διὰ τοῦ αὐτοῦ γραφείου τῷ ἐνάτῳ ἔτει θεοῦ Τραιανοῦ, μεθʼ ἃς προσήνεγκεν αὐτῇ κατὰ τὴν αὐτὴν συμβίωσιν φερνὴν ἀργυρίου δραχμὰς πεντακοσίας , ἁπάσας δραχμὰς χιλίας ἑκατὸν
παρὰ ταῦτα ποιήσῃ. ἐπεὶ δὲ καὶ τοῦτό τινες ἐμέμψαντο ὡς αὐτοὶ μὲν τὰ βιβλία προσφέροντες οἷς ὀφείλουσιν, ἐκείνους δὲ μὴ βουλομένους παρʼ αὐτῶν λαμβάνειν ἵνα τὴν παρολκὴν ἐξωνήσωνται τῷ
ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,
pers. pron.
I.
ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…
Read the full entry →ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…
Read the full entry →μέ (me) — me.
ἐγώ,
I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…
ἐγώ
me
a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.
see GREEK for 1691
ἐγώ egō 2x
I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]
Pron-1DS — Personal pronoun · first person · dative · singulardative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
P-1DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Dative Number: Singular
2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
The Greek word ἔτος (i.e., etos) means 'a year.' It is used in various contexts, including references to age and duration, as well as in phrases indicating yearly occurrences. The New Testament cites it in passages like Luke 3:1 and Hebrews 1:12. The word can also appear in different grammatical forms, such as the plural ἔτη.
ἔτος, -ους, [gen. plur. ἐτῶν, cf. B. 14 (13)], τό, [fr. Hom. down], Hebr. τ), α year: Lk. iii. 1; Acts vii. 80; Heb. i. 12; 2 Pet. iii. 8; Rev. xx. 3, ete.; ἔτη ἔχειν, to have passed years, Jn. viii. 57; with ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ added, Jn. v. 5 [ef. W. § 32, 6]; εἶναι, γίνεσθαι, yeyovevat ἐτῶν, 6. g. δώδεκα, to be twelve years old [ef. Eng. (a boy) of twelve years]: Mk. v.42; Lk. ii. 42; iii. 23 [ef. W. 349 (328)]; viii. 42; Actsiv. 22; γεγονυῖα ἔλαττον ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα, less than sixty years old, 1 Tim. v. 9 [W. 590 (549)]; dat. plur., of the space of time within which a thing is done [W. § 31, 9a.; B. § 133, 26], Jn. ii. 20; Acts xiii. 20; ace., in answer to the quest. how long?: Mt. ix. 20; Mk. ν. 25; Lk. ii. 86; xiii. 7 sq. 11,16; xv. εὖ 256 29; Acts vii. 6, 36, 42; Heb. iii. 10 (9), 17; Rev. xx. 2, 4,6. preceded bya prep.: ἀπό, from... on, since, Lk. viii. 43; Ro. xv. 23; in the same sense…
Read the full entry →ἔτος. P Tebt 11. 412% (late ii/A.D.) ἄνελθε εἰς τὴν μητρόπολιν τοῦ νέου ἔτους, ‘‘come up to the metropolis at the New Year.” For κατ᾽ ἔτος, ‘‘ yearly,” as in Lk 2", cf. P Amh Il. 86" (a.p. 78) ds (sc. δραχμὰς) Kal ἀπίοδ]ώσω kar’ ἔτος ἐξενίαυτα, the yearly charge was to be paid annually, P Oxy IV. 725%* (a contract of apprenticeship—a.D. 183) ἀργήσει δὲ ὁ παῖς els λόγον ἑορτῶν κατ᾽ ἔτος ἡμέρας εἴκοσι, “the boy shall have 20 holidays in the year on account of festivals’ (Edd.): for καθ᾽ ἔτος see P Tebt II. 31125 (A.D. 134), 373!%14 (A D. 110-1), α΄ The aspirated form καθ᾽ éros is also fairly common, e.g. P Petr III. r9(c)3* (B.c. 224) where the words καθ᾽ éros have been added above the line, and the editor explains the form as due to false analogy with καθ᾽ ἡμέραν : see further Meyer ΟἿ. p- 326f., Proleg. p. 44. Ka’ ἕτος is read guater in P Ryl II. 166 (A.D. 26), and ἐφ᾽ ros in P Oxy X.…
Read the full entry →ἔτος (etos) — year.
ἔτος, εος, τό,
irregular dative ἔτῃ [Refs]:—year, τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων in bygone years, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τόδ᾽ ἐεικοστὸν ἔ. ἐστὶν ἐξ οὗ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔ. ἐνιαυτῶν, see at {ἐνιαυτό; ἑκάστου ἔτους} [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἔτους πέμπτου every fifth year, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ ἔ. every year, [NT+5th c.BC+]; ἔ. εἰς ἔ. year after year, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ ἔτους annually, [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; παρὰ ἔ. every other year, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]yearly, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τρίτῳ ἔτεϊ τούτων in the third year after this, [Refs]; frequently in accusative, ἔ. τόδ᾽ ἤδη δέκατον.. βόσκων now for these ten years, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person's age, γεγονὼς ἔτη τρία ἀπολείποντα τῶν ἑκατόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; without γεγονώς, τοὺς ὑπὲρ τετταράκοντα ἔτη [Refs], etc.: in genitive, ἐπειδὰν ἐτῶν ᾖ τις τριάκοντα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μυρίων ἐτῶν within a period of [Refs]years…
Read the full entry →ἔτος
etos
apparently a primary word; a year:--year.
ἔτος, ους, τό
n.n.
a year
ἔτος etos 49x
a year, Lk. 2:41; 3:23
ἔτος ἔτος, εος, a year, Hom., etc.; τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων in bygone years, Il.; ἑκάστου ἔτους every year, Plat.; ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος Anth.; ἀνὰ πέντε ἔτεα every five years, Hdt.; δι᾽ ἔτους πέμπτου every fifth year, Ar.; κατὰ ἔτος every year, Thuc.; ἔτος εἰς ἔτος year after year, Soph.; in acc., ἔτος τόδ᾽ ἤδη δέκατον now for these ten years, id. Soph.
Noun-APN — Noun · accusative · plural · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
N-APN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 49 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 309 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Παῖς μὲν ἄνηβος ἐὼν ἔτι νήπιος ἕρκος ὀδόντων φύσας ἐκβάλλει πρῶτον ἐν ἕπτ’ ἔτεσιν·
περιέχει ἡ βίβλος χρόνον ἐτῶν ὡς Ἰώσηπος ͵γη, Ἑβραῖοι ͵αωοβ, Εὐσέβιος ͵γυνθ.
οὐ μὴ γένῃ, φησίν, παιδοφθόρος οὐδὲ ὁμοιωθήσῃ τοῖς τοιούτοις, ὅτι ὁ λαγωὸς κατ̓ ἐνιαυτὸν πλεονεκτεῖ τὴν ἀφόδευσιν: ὅσα γὰρ ἔτη ζῇ, τοσαύτας ἔχει τρύπας.
ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ
τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Νεχούτης Σχώτου τοῦ Φιμήνιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων
ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ὠνή. ἀπέδοτο Πανοβχοῦνις Παοῦτος Πέρσης τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ὡς ἐτῶν ξ μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπαρχούσης αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς
τεσσεράκοντα (transliterated as tessarakonta) means 'forty' and is indeclinable. It appears in several New Testament verses, including Matthew 4:2 and John 2:20. The word has variations in spelling, notably τεσσαράκοντα, which is more common in earlier texts. Additionally, in classical contexts, it refers to a body of justices known as 'the Forty'.
τεσσεράκοντα. The spelling τεσσεράκοντα for τεσσαράκοντα is adopted in all the NT occurrences of the word, but is by no means common in the papyri during i-iii/a.p.: see however P Flor I. 61% (A.D. 85) (= Chrest. II. p. 89) διὰ τεσ[σ]εράκοντα ἐτῶν, 26. 869 (i/a.p.), P Gen I. 241} (A.D. 96), P Tebt II. 388819 (A.D. 98), P Oxy XIV. 1685'® (a.p. 158), and BGU III. 916* (Vespasian) ὡς ἐτῶν τεσεράκοντία. For the spelling τεσσαράκοντα, which is universal in Ptolemaic times and predominant till the Byzantine age, it is sufficient to note P Lond 2628 (A.D. 11) (=II. p. 177) ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα τριῶν (but τεσσερακόστου in /. +), and P Fay 12218 (c. A.D. 100) ὑποδείγματα μεγάλων Teco apaκοντα, ‘‘ forty specimens of the large sort.” The two forms τεσσ]αράκοντα and τεσσεράκοντα are found in the same document P Meyer 61718 (Α. Ὁ. 125), evidence, as Deissmann has pointed out (ad ἃ. p- 43f.), that in…
Read the full entry →τεσσαράκοντα (tessarakonta) — forty.
τεσσᾰράκοντα [ρᾰ],
Attic dialect τεττᾰράκοντα [Refs]; Ionic dialect τεσσεράκοντα (which see); Sicilian Ionic τετράϟοντα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τετρώκοντα [Refs 4th c.BC+] and see at {τεσσαρακοστός}; once Doric dialect τεταράκοντα [Refs]; Boeotian dialect πετταράκοντα (which see): οἱ, αἱ, τά, indeclinable:—forty, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. οἱ τ. the Forty, a body of justices who went round the Attic demes to hear all causes up to ten drachmae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also cases of assault, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: changed from Thirty to “Forty” after the expulsion of the Thirty Tyrants, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
τεσσεράκοντα
tessarakonta
the decade of 5064; forty:--forty.
see GREEK for 5064
τεσσαράκοντα
Indec.num.
forty
τεσσαράκοντα τέσσαρες forty, Hom., etc.
οἱ τ. the Forty, a body of justices who went round the Attic demes to hear causes, Dem.
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominativenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)
21 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 62 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
λέγει γὰρ ὁ προφήτης: Καὶ ἦν Μωϋσῆς νηστεύων ἐν ὄρει Σινᾶ, τοῦ λαβεῖν τὴν διαθήκην κυρίου πρὸς τὸν λαόν, ἡμέρας τεσσεράκοντα καὶ νύκτας τεσσεράκοντα.
Φαρμοῦθι ἑβδόμηι ἐν Τεπτύνει τῆς Πολέμωνος μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου. ὁμολογοῦσιν Χαιρήμων Ἁρμιύσιος ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα ἑπτά , οὐλὴ καρπῶι ἀριστερῶι, καὶ ὁ τούτου υἱὸς Ὀρσενοῦφις ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι ἑνός
τοῦ Ἡρώδου, ἡ Ἀπία μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἑαυτῆς ἀνδρὸς Διδύμου τοῦ Λυσιμάχου ὡς ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα ἓξ οὐλὴ μήλωι δεξιῶι οἱ δύο Θαήσι Ψενκήβκιος τοῦ καὶ Κρονίωνος τοῦ Μαρσισούχου ὡς
ἐπιμίξω ἑτέροις πρόβασι ὧν ποιμὴν ἐγὼ ὁ Λύκος. ἀπεγραψάμην παρὰ στρατηγῷ πρόβατα ρμ ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα αἶγας θ ἐννέα. ἔτους γ Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Μεχεὶρ ε. ἀπεγραψάμην παρὰ βασιλικῷ
The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.
ἐν,
prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).
Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…
Read the full entry →ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…
Read the full entry →ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…
Read the full entry →ἐν (en) — in/on/among.
ἐν,
poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]
__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.
__A WITH DAT.
__A.I OF PLACE,
__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…
ἐν
en
a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or
state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or
constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519
and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +
almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+
all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,
-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,
one, X quickly,
X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),
through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,
with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same
import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate
direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)
preposition.
see GREEK for 1519
see GREEK for 1537
ἐν
Prep.
in, on, among
ἐν en 2x
followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of,
ἐν
e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.
Lat. in.
PREP. WITH DAT.:
OF PLACE
in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.
in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.
in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.
in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.
in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
A principal thing to notice about this preposition, which in the King James Version represents about 16 Hebrew and as many Greek words and prepositions, is that, in hundreds of cases (especially in the Old Testament, but frequently also in the New Testament) in the Revised Version (British and American) the rendering is changed to more exact forms ("to," "unto," "by," "upon," "at," "with," "among," "for," "throughout," etc.; compare e.g. Ge 6:16; 13:8; 17:7,9,12; 18:1; Ex 8:17; Le 1:9, etc.); while, nearly as often, "in" is substituted for divergent forms of the King James Version (e.g. Ge 2:14; 17:11; 31:54; 40:7; 49:17; Ex…
2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-DSF — Article · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-DSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἔρημος (i.e. *eremos*) means solitary or desolate, often referring to deserted places or people. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 14:13 and Galatians 4:27. The term can also denote a wilderness or uninhabited region, as seen in Matthew 3:1. Lexicons agree on its meanings, emphasizing its use for both physical and metaphorical desolation.
ἔρημος
(in older Gk. ἔρῆμος), -ον
[in LXX chiefly for מִדְבָּר ;]
solitary, lonely, desolate, deserted:
of persons, γυνή, Ga 4:27 (LXX);
ἔρημος, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, ef. W. § 11, 1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent οἵ. Chandler 88 393, 394; W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, uninhabited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 32; Lk. iv. 42; ix.10[RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,ete.; ἡ ὁδός, leading through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Γάζα, sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, kindred ; bereft; (so often by Grk. writ. of every age, as Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; ἔρημός τε καὶ ὑπὸ πάντων καταλειφθείς, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. Bekk.]; of a flock deserted-by the shepherd, Hom. II. 5, 140) : γυνή, ἃ woman neglected by her husband, from whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. liv.1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ’s presence, instruction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 {L and WH…
Read the full entry →ἔρημος. P Lille I. 263 (iii/B.c.) ἡ κώμη ἔρημος διὰ τὸ πλείω χρόνον μὴ βεβρέχθαι, “the village deserted because for long there has been no inundation,” P Tebt II. 3084 (A.D. 174) ἐρήμου αἰγιαλοῦ, ““ desert shore,” OG/S 5807 (A.D. 367-75) τὸν τόπον. . . πρότερον ἀγνοούμενον καὶ ἔρημον. For the legal use of the adj. to denote judgment going ‘‘ by default” owing to the non-appearance of the accused party, cf. P Hib I. 328 (B.c. 246) Νεοπτολέμου Μακεδόνος ἰδιώτου τ[ῶν] ᾿Αντιόχου πρὸς καταδίκην ἔρημον ὕβρεως πρὸς (δραχμάς) σ, ‘‘(property of) Neoptolemus, Macedonian, a private in Antiochus’ troop, who had been condemned by default for violence to a fine of 200 drachmae” (Edd.): cf. Crest. II. i. p-18n.3 On the accent of ἔρημος see Brugmann-Thumb Gr. p. 185. The adj. survives in MGr = ‘“‘lonely,” ‘* forsaken”: cf. also the Klepht ballad, Abbott Songs, p. 1813, where τἄρημα τ᾽ ἄρματα τἄρημα τὰ…
Read the full entry →ἔρημος (erēmos) — deserted.
ἐρῆμος, ον,
feminine ἐρήμη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Attic dialect ἔρημος, ον, accusative to Hdn.Gr.[Refs]: comparative -ότερος [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ότατος[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—desolate, lonely, solitary,
1. of places, ἐς νῆσον ἐρήμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐ. τῆς Λιβύης the desert parts.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐρῆμος (i.e. χώρα) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; empty, πνύξ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. of personsor animals, τὰ δ᾽ ἐρῆμα φοβεῖται (i.e. the sheep), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently of poor, friendless persons, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐρημότεροι, opposed to δυνατώτεροι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]solitary, not gregarious, [Refs 1st c.AD+] adverb, ἔρημα κλαίω I weep in solitude, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔρημον ἐμβλέπειν to look vacantly, [Refs 5th…
ἔρημος
eremos
of uncertain affinity; lonesome, i.e. (by implication) waste (usually
as a noun, 5561 being implied):--desert, desolate, solitary,
wilderness.
see GREEK for 5561
ἔρημος, ον
Adj
deserted, desolate, a desert
Adj-DSF — Adjective · dative · singular · femininedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-DSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
wil'-der-nes.
See DESERT; JUDAEA, WILDERNESS OF; WANDERINGS OF ISRAEL.
Wilderness
(1.) Heb. midhbar, denoting not a barren desert but a district or region suitable for pasturing sheep and cattle (Ps. 65:12; Isa. 42:11; Jer. 23:10; Joel 1:19; 2:22); an uncultivated place. This word is used of the wilderness of Beersheba (Gen. 21:14), on the southern border of Palestine; the wilderness of the Red Sea (Ex. 13:18); of Shur (15:22), a portion of the Sinaitic peninsula; of Sin (17:1), Sinai (Lev. 7:38), Moab (Deut. 2:8), Judah (
See DESERT.
50 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 47 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 247 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὔτε ὁ νοῦς ἐνόει οὔτε ἡ αἴσθησις ᾐσθάνετο, ἀλλ’ ἦν ὁ μὲν τοῦ νοεῖν ἔρημός τε καὶ γυμνός, ἡ δὲ τοῦ αἰσθάνεσθαι.
ὑπαντιάζει δὲ διὰ τῆς ἐρήμου προϊοῦσαν αὐτὴν ἄγγελος θεῖος κελεύων πρὸς τοὺς δεσπότας ἐπανιέναι·
Καὶ ἐμπτύσατε πάντες καὶ κατακεντήσατε καὶ περίθετε τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον περὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὕτως εἰς ἔρημον βληθήτω.
καιρῶι πυρῶι καὶ τοῖς ἁρμόζουσι καὶ … … σι γένεσι καὶ μηδεμίαν ἄρουραν ἐᾶσαι ἔρημον ἢ ἄβροχον ἢ ἔνβροχον παυ … ν … τῆς καθʼ ὁνδηποτεοῦν τρόπον διʼ ἀμέλειαν
τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ἐρήμου φυλακίας Νεφερῶς Ἁτρῆτος εἰσάγων ἐπὶ ὄνῳ ἑνὶ ἐλαίου μετρητὰς τέσσαρας … … ιχδι
Αὐρηλίου Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Ἁθὺρ ιγ. διέγραψεν Ἀμμωνίῳ καὶ Θέωνι μισθωταῖς δρυμῶν καὶ ἐρήμου αἰγιαλοῦ Πολέμωνος μερίδος Πετεσοῦχος Πετεσούχου ἱερεὺς Τεπτύνεως τιμὴν βίβλου μυριάδων δύο ἐν Ἰβίωνι Ἀργαίου
οἶκος (oikos) primarily means a house or dwelling, but it also extends to refer to a household or family. In the New Testament, it is used in various contexts, including literal homes (Acts 2:2) and metaphorical uses such as the Church (1 Peter 2:5). The word can denote a sanctuary or temple, reflecting its broader significance in both Greek and Hebrew traditions.
οἶκος, -οῦ, ὁ,
[in LXX chiefly for בַּיִת, also for הֵיכָל, אֹהֶל, etc.;]
prop., a house, dwelling: Ac 2:2 19:16; c. gen. poss., Mt 9:6, 7, Mk 2:11, Lk 1:23, al.; c. gen. attrib., ἐμπορίου, Jo 2:16; προσευχῆς, Mt 21:13, al.; of a sanctuary (Hdt., Eur.): οἶ. τ. θεοῦ, of the tabernacle, Mt 12:4, al.; the temple, Mt 21:13, al.; metaph. of a city: Mt 23:38, Lk 13:35; of the body,
οἶκος, -ου, ὁ, [ef. Lat. views, Eng. ending -wich; Curtius § 95], fr. Hom. down; Sept. in numberless places for 13, also for ‘on a palace, mk a tent, ete.; 1. a house; a. strictly, an inhabited house [differing thus fr. δόμος the building]: Acts ii. 2; xix. 16; τινός, Mt. ix. 6 sq.; Mk. ii. 11; v. 38; Lk. i. 23, 40, 56; viii. 39, 41, εἴς. ; ἔρχεσθαι eis οἶκον, to come into a house (domum venire), Mk. iii. 20 (19); εἰς τὸν οἶκον, into the (i. 6. his or their) house, home, Lk. vii. 10; xv. 6; ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ, in the (her) house, Jn. xi. 20; ἐν οἴκῳ, at home, 1 Co. xi. 34; xiv. 35; of εἰς τὸν οἶκον (see eis, C. 2), Lk. ix. 61; κατ᾽ οἶκον, opp. to ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, in a household assembly, in private, [R. V. at home; see κατά, II. 1 d.], Acts ii. 46; ν. 42; κατ᾽ οἴκους, opp. to δημοσίᾳ, in private houses, [A. V. from house to house; see κατά, II. 3 a.], Acts xx. 20; κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος…
Read the full entry →οἶκος. As illustrating the NT conception of the otkos πνευματukds and the οἶκος τοῦ θεοῦ Thieme (p. 31) refers not only to the place which ‘‘the house of God” had in Jewish religion, but also to the ‘‘holy houses” of Greek antiquity, as preparing the way for the Christian usage (1 Tim 3}°, 1 Pet 417): see e.g. Magn 945 (ii/B.c.), where a certain Εὔφημος ἸΤαυσανίου νεωκόρος is praised for his liberality— eis T]O[v olk]Jov τὸν ἱερόν, 2. 1177 (Ist half ii/A.p.) τῷ ἱερῷ οἴκῳ τῶν ἐν Κλίδωνι, and Sy// 571 (-- 8 987)% (iv/B.c.), where mention is made of an οἶκος τεμένιος ἱερός in Chios. In Herodas i. 26 οἶκος τῆς θεοῦ refers to Aphrodite. From the fact that a tomb was often dedicated to a local deity, and hence became his ‘‘temple” or ‘‘home,” it is natural that οἶκος should be used in inscrr. in the sense of ““tomb,”’ as at Cibyra BCH ii. (1878), p. 610 f., and Magnesia Ζό. xviii. (1894) p.…
Read the full entry →οἶκος (oikos) — house: home.
οἶκος, ὁ,
house, not only of built houses, but of any dwelling-place, as that of Achilles at Troy (see. κλισία), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the Cyclops' cave, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a tent, [LXX]; οἶκον ἱκάνεται is coming home, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; εἰς or ἐς οἶκον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ κατ᾽ οἶκον[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρῆσαι go home wards, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, [Refs]; compare οἰκία.
__b frequently omitted after εἰς or ἐν, see at {εἰς} [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. room, chamber, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; dining-hall, ἑπτάκλινος οἶ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; room in a temple, [Refs] frequently, = a single house, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; κλαυθμῶν τῶν ἐξ οἴκων domestic griefs, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐς or πρὸς οἴκους, [Refs]; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, [Refs 5th…
οἶκος
oikos
of uncertain affinity; a dwelling (more or less extensive, literal or
figurative); by implication, a family (more or less related, literally
or figuratively):--home, house(-hold), temple.
οἶκος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a house, household
οἶκος oikos 114x
a house, dwelling, Mt. 9:6, 7; Mk. 2:1, 11; 3:20; place of abode, seat, site, Mt. 23:38; Lk. 13:35; met. a spiritual house or structure, 1 Pet. 2:5; meton. a household, family, Lk. 10:5; 11:17; a spiritual household, 1 Tim. 3:15; Heb. 3:6; family, lineage, Lk. 1:27, 69; 2:4; from the Hebrew, a people, nation, Mt. 10:6; 15:24
οἶκος οἶκος, ὁ, a house, abode, dwelling, Hom., Hes., etc.:— acc. οἶκον, ῀ οἶκόνδε, οἴκαδε, homeward, home, Od.; κατ᾽ οἴκους at home, within, Hdt.; κατ᾽ οἶκον Soph., etc: —ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀποχωρεῖν to go home wards, Thuc., etc.: ἀπ᾽ οἴκου from home, id. Thuc.
part of a house, a room, chamber, Od.: pl. οἶκοι for a single house, Lat. aedes, tecta, id. Od., attic
the house of a god, a temple, Hdt., Eur.
one's house, household goods, substance, Hom., etc.
a house, household, family, Od., etc.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
hous (bayith; oikos, in classical Greek generally "an estate," oikia, oikema (literally, "habitation"), in Ac 12:1, "prison"):
I. CAVE DWELLINGS
II. STONE-BUILT AND MUD/BRICK-BUILT HOUSES
1. Details of Plan and Construction
(1) Corner-Stone
(2) Floor
(3) Gutter
(4) Door
(5) Hinge
(6) Lock and Key
(7) Threshold
(8) Hearth
(9) Window
(10) Roof
2. Houses of More than One Story
(1) Upper Chambers and Stairs
(2) Palaces and Castles
3. Internal Appearance
III. OTHER MEANINGS
LITERATURE
I. Cave Dwellings.
The earliest permanent habitations of the prehistoric inhabitants of Palestine were the natural caves which abound throughout the country. As the people increased and grouped themselves into communities, these abodes were supplemented by systems of artificial caves which, in some cases, developed into extensive burrowings of many adjoining compartments, having…
House
Till their sojourn in Egypt the Hebrews dwelt in tents. They then for the first time inhabited cities (Gen. 47:3; Ex. 12:7; Heb. 11:9). From the earliest times the Assyrians and the Canaanites were builders of cities. The Hebrews after the Conquest took possession of the captured cities, and seem to have followed the methods of building that had been pursued by the Canaanites. Reference is made to the stone (1 Kings 7:9; Isa. 9:10) and marble (1 Chr. 29:2) used in building, and to the internal wood-work of the houses (
The houses of the rural poor in Egypt, as well as in most parts of Syria, Arabia and Persia, are generally mere huts of mud or sunburnt bricks. In some parts of Palestine and Arabia stone is used, and in certain districts caves in the rocks are used as dwellings. (Amos 5:11) The houses are usually of one story only, viz., the ground floor, and often contain only one apartment. Sometimes a small court for the cattle is attached; and in some cases the cattle are housed in the same building, or the live in a raised platform, and, the cattle round them on the ground. (1 Samuel 28:24) The windows are small apertures high up in the walls, sometimes grated with wood. The roofs are commonly but not always flat, and are usually formed of plaster of mud and straw laid upon boughs or…
Is often put for dwelling, residence; and hence the temple, and even the tabernacle, are called the house of God.
The universal mode of building houses in the East, is in the form of a hollow square, with an open court or yard in the center; which is thus entirely shut in by the walls of the house around it. Into this court all the windows open, there being usually no windows towards the street. Some houses of large size require several courts, and these usually communicate with each other. These courts are commonly paved; and in many large houses parts of them are planted with shrubs and trees, Ps 84:3 128:3; they have also, when possible, a fountain in them, often with a jet d’ eau, 2Sa 17:18. It is customary in many houses to extend an awning over the whole court in hot…
113 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 114 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 890 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ εὔλογον τῷ ὄντι πρῶτον αὐτὸν εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἄριστόν τε ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κἀκ τοῦ καθαρωτάτου τῆς οὐσίας παγέντα, διότι θεῶν ἐμφανῶν τε καὶ αἰσθητῶν ἔμελλεν οἶκος ἔσεσθαι ἱερώτατος.
αὔξων δὲ τὸν οἶκον πλήθει χρημάτων ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ βίας πρὸς ἡδονὴν καὶ λῃστείαν τοὺς ἐντυγχάνοντας παρακαλῶν διδάσκαλος αὐτοῖς ὑπῆρχε πονηρῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων, καὶ τὴν ἀπραγμοσύνην, ᾗ πρότερον συνέζων οἱ ἄνθρωποι, μέτρων ἐπινοίᾳ καὶ σταθμῶν μετεστήσατο…
διάθρυπτε πεινῶσιν τὸν ἄρτον σου, καὶ γυμνὸν ἐὰν ἴδῃς περίβαλε: ἀστέγους εἴσαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκον σου, καὶ ἐὰν ἴδῃς ταπεινόν, οὐχ ὑπερόψῃ αὐτόν, οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκείων τοῦ σπέρματός σου.
ἀποκαταστησάτωσαν εἰς οἶκον τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶσι καθότι πρόκειται ἀποτεισάτωσαν ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ
καὶ παρεχέτω τὸν οἶνον μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου
δεδανεισμένος Ὥρωι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν
The Greek word Ἰσραήλ (i.e., *Israēl*) refers to Israel, the name given to Jacob and his descendants. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to the house, people, and tribes of Israel, as well as metaphorically for Christians. The term is indeclinable and has a range of meanings related to the Jewish nation and its heritage.
Ἰσραήλ (FlJ, Ἰσράηλος, -ου), ὁ, indecl. (Heb. יִשְׂרָאֵל, Ge 32:28),
Israel: ὁ οἶκος Ἰ., Ac 7:42(LXX), al.; λαός, Ac 4:10; υἱοί, Ac 5:21, al.; αἱ φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰ., Mt 19:28, al. By meton., for the Israelites, Mt 2:6, Lk 1:54, Ro 11:2, al.; ὁ λαὸς Ἰ., Ac 4:10; γῆ Ἰ., Mt 2:20, 21; βασιλεὺς Ἰ., Read the full entry →
Ἰσραήλ (Joseph. Ἰσράηλος, -ov), 6, indecl., Osi, fr. by and wv, wrestler with God, Gen. xxxii. 28; Hos. xii. 4, cf. Gen. xxxy. 10), Israel, a name given to the patriarch Jacob (and borne by him in addition to his former name from Gen. xxxii. 28 on): ὁ οἶκος Ἰσραήλ, the family or descendants of Israel, the race of Israel [A. V. the house of Israel], Mt. x.6; xv. 24; Acts vii. 42, (Ex. xvi. 31; 1S. vii. 2, and often) ; of υἱοὶ Ἰσρ. the [sons i. 6. the children, the] posterity of Israel, Lk. i. 16; Acts v. 21; vii. 23,37; Ro. ix. 27; ai φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἴσρ., Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. vii.4. | By meton. for the posterity of Israel i. e. the Israelites (a name of esp. honor because it made reference to the promises of salvation through the Messiah, which were given to Jacob in preference to Esau, and to be fulfilled to his posterity [see Ἰουδαῖος, b.]): Mt. ii. 6; vili.10; ix.33; Lk.i. 54…
Read the full entry →Ἰσραήλ (Israēl) — Israel.
Ἰσραήλ (FlJ, Ἰσράηλος, -ου), ὁ indecl. (Heb. יִשְׂרָאֵל, Gen.32:28),
Israel: ὁ οἶκος Ἰ., Act.7:42 (LXX), al.; λαός, Act.4:10; υὁοί, Act.5:21, al.; αἱ φυλαὶ τοῦ Ἰ., Mat.19:28, al. By meton., for the Israelites, Mat.2:6, Luk.1:54, Rom.11:2, al.; ὁ λαὸς Ἰ., Act.4:10; γῆ Ἰ., Mat.2:20-21…
Read the full entry →Ἰσραήλ
Israel
of Hebrew origin (3478); Israel (i.e. Jisrael), the adopted name of
Jacob, including his descendants (literally or figuratively):--Israel.
see HEBREW for 03478
Ἰσραήλ, ὁ
Prop.n.
Israel
Ἰσραήλ Israēl 68x
Israel, pr. name, indecl.
Noun-PRI — Noun · proper name, indeclinableN-PRI Indeclinable PRoper Noun
iz'-ra-el.
See JACOB.
Israel
The name conferred on Jacob after the great prayer-struggle at Peniel (Gen. 32:28), because “as a prince he had power with God and prevailed.” (See JACOB.) This is the common name given to Jacob’s descendants. The whole people of the twelve tribes are called “Israelites,” the “children of Israel” (Josh. 3:17; 7:25; Judg. 8:27; Jer. 3:21), and the “house of Israel” (Ex. 16:31; 40:38).
This name Israel is sometimes used emphatically for the true Israel (Ps. 73:1: Isa. 45:17; 49:3;
(the prince that prevails with God). The name given, (Genesis 32:28) to Jacob after his wrestling with the angel, (Hosea 12:4) at Peniel. Gesenius interprets Israel "soldier of God." It became the national name of the twelve tribes collectively. They are so called in (Exodus 3:16) and afterward. It is used in a narrower sense, excluding Judah, in (1 Samuel 11:8; 2 Samuel 20:1; 1 Kings 12:16) Thenceforth it was assumed and accepted as the name of the northern kingdom. After the Babylonian captivity, the returned exiles resumed the name Israel as the designation of…
Who prevails with God, a name given to Jacob, after having wrestled with the Angel-Jehovah at Penuel. Ge 32:1,2,28,30 Ho 12:3. See JACOB. By the name Israel is sometimes understood all the posterity of Israel, the seed of Jacob, 1Co 10:18; sometimes all true believers, his spiritual seed, Ro 9:6; and sometimes the kingdom of Israel, or the ten tribes, as distinct from the kingdom of Judah.
69 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 1,204 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὐκ ἀφήσει δὲ ὁ θεὸς τὸν τοῦ ὁρῶντος ἔγγονον Ἰσραὴλ οὕτως τραπῆναι, ὥστε πληγῆναι ὑπὸ τῆς τροπῆς, ἀλλὰ ἀναδραμεῖν καὶ ἀνακῦψαι ὥσπερ ἐκ βυθοῦ καὶ ἀνασωθῆναι βιάσεται.
ἔτι δὲ κἀκεῖνο, ἀδελφοί μου, νοεῖτε: ὅταν βλέπετε μετὰ τηλικαῦτα σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γεγονότα ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ, καὶ οὕτως ἐγκαταλελεῖφθαι αὐτούς: προσέχωμεν, μήποτε, ὡς γέγραπται, πολλοὶ κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοὶ εὑρεθῶμεν.
διὰ ζῆλος Δαυεὶδ φθόνον ἔσχεν οὐ μόνον ὑπὸ τῶν ἀλλοφύλων, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὑπὸ Σαοὺλ βασιλέως Ἰσραὴλ ἐδιώχθη.
ἀνθρώπωι καὶ γεννητὸς ἐσταυρωμένος ἀγέννητος δὲ καὶ ὡς ἔστιν ἐν οἰκίᾳ Ἰουδᾶ ἐν τῷ Ἰσραήλ - ἐν γὰρ Κέλλει ἦν καὶ ὁ ποταμός -, καὶ ὅτι ἐν τῷ ἔθνει